JP2023147888A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that does not grant excessive prize balls to a player.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine PY1 includes a microcomputer 101 for game control capable of controlling a game and a microcomputer 121 for performance control capable of executing prescribed display. The microcomputer 101 for game control is capable of measuring a difference ball number which is obtained by subtracting a total number of shot balls from a total number of prize balls, and when a prescribed condition including a fact that the difference ball number is a predetermined 80000 or more is established, stops game control processing and shooting control processing. The microcomputer 121 for performance control is capable of executing an excessive prize ball abnormality suggestion performance for suggesting the possibility of the game control processing and the shooting control processing being stopped by the game control means 101.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 83

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 below, various winning openings (starting opening, big winning opening, general winning opening) are provided in a gaming area where game balls can flow down. When game balls enter the various winning holes, prize balls are awarded to the player.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the problem is to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to players.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
a game control means capable of controlling the game;
A gaming machine equipped with a performance control means capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to a player,
When a predetermined condition including that the specific measured number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number is satisfied, controlling the game to be impossible;
The performance control means is
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to execute a control suggestion performance that suggests the possibility that the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the game control means.

According to the present invention, it is possible to avoid awarding excessive prize balls to the player.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a front view showing the second grand prize winning device etc. in detail. It is a front view of display devices. (A) is a front view of the performance unit when the above-board movable device and the under-board movable device are in a standby state, and (B) is a front view of the performance unit when the above-board movable device and the under-board movable device are activated. FIG. 3 is a front view of the unit. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control board side. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine. It is a front view showing a 7-segment display. (A) is a table showing random numbers related to general drawings, and (B) is a table showing random numbers related to special drawings. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a reach determination table. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. This is a look-ahead determination table. This is a jackpot game control table. It is an explanatory diagram of a gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of production mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of normal variation of special figure variation performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of N reach of the special figure variation effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of SP reach of the special figure variation effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a hold effect. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a movable body effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of operation performance. It is a figure which shows the over-winning ball prevention function. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference number of balls. (A) is a diagram showing a performance mode in the case of an over-prize ball abnormality, and (B) is a diagram showing a performance mode in the case of a magnetic detection abnormality. (A) is a diagram showing an over-prize ball preview image, and (B) is a diagram showing a game stop preview image. It is a diagram in which a purple border image is displayed when in a high-accuracy, high-base state. (A) is a diagram showing when the special reset switch is pressed, and (B) is a diagram showing when one hour has elapsed in the customer waiting state. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an over-prized ball advance suggestion performance and an over-prized ball preview performance. They are a diagram showing an over-prize ball preview image and a diagram showing a game stop preview image during a jackpot game state. It is a figure for explaining the display image displayed on a display screen when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of input processing. It is a flowchart of difference ball number measurement processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of customer waiting measurement processing. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of special symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of game stop setting processing. It is a flowchart of output processing. It is a flowchart of outer end signal output processing. It is a flowchart of sub-control main processing. It is a flowchart of 1m timer interrupt processing. 10 is a flowchart of 10m timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of processing at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating production start process. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating settings for displaying a display image during initial settings at power-on in a first modification example. It is a figure for explaining the display image displayed on a display screen when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated in the second modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the display image displayed on a display screen when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated in the 3rd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the display image displayed on a display screen when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated in the 4th modification. It is a table showing the winning expectation of the icon in the fifth modification. In the fifth modification, it is a diagram showing an example of an icon advance notice change effect executed during setting of the definite change effect mode. In the fifth modification, it is a diagram showing an example of an icon advance notice change effect executed during setting of the definite change effect mode. It is a flowchart of sensor detection processing of a 5th modification. It is a flowchart of sensor detection processing of a 5th modification. In the sixth modification, it is a diagram showing an example of an icon preview change effect executed during setting of the definite change effect mode. In the sixth modification, it is a diagram showing an example of an icon preview change effect executed during setting of the definite change effect mode. It is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process of the 6th modification. It is a flowchart of the processing at the time of starting winning of the seventh modification. It is a timing chart showing the opening pattern of the second big prize opening and the operation pattern of the distribution member in the small winning game in the eighth modification. They are a jackpot game control table and a small win game control table of the eighth modification. This is a game flow of an eighth modification. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function of the 8th modification. It is a flowchart of the input processing of the 8th modification. It is a front view of the game board unit of the 9th modification. (A) is a diagram showing the flow of game balls when the opening/closing member of the electric chew of the ninth modification is in the open state, and (B) is a diagram showing the flow of the game ball when the opening/closing member of the electric chew of the ninth modification is in the closed state. It is a diagram showing the flow of game balls at the time. They are a jackpot game control table and a small win game control table of the ninth modification. It is a figure for explaining the variable display of the 1st special symbol and the variable display of the 2nd special symbol in a 9th modification. This is a game flow of a ninth modified example. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function of the 9th modification. This is an example of the special figure variation performance in the ninth modification. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a case where an over-prized ball abnormality suggestion performance and an entering prize ball acquisition performance are executed in a ninth modification example. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a case where an operation notification effect is executed in a ninth modification. It is a flowchart of received command analysis processing of a ninth modification. It is a flowchart of the award ball number announcement production process of the ninth modification. It is a flowchart of the entry prize ball acquisition production process of the ninth modified example. It is a flowchart of the excessive prize ball abnormality suggestion production process of the 9th modification. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function of another example of a change. (A) is a diagram showing a super prize ball preview image in another modification example, and (B) is a diagram showing a game stop preview image in another modification example. (A) is a diagram in which a purple border image is displayed when the high-accuracy, high-base state is in another modified example, and (B) is a diagram in which a red-rimmed image is displayed when in the high-accuracy, high-base state in another modified example. is displayed. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in another modification. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference number of balls in another modification. It is a figure which shows the case where the difference number of balls is displayed on a 7 segment display in another modification. It is a figure explaining the maximum difference number of balls in another example of a change. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the transition of the counter in a modification example in which an over-prize ball prevention function is activated based on the number of balls increased from the minimum difference ball number in another modification example.

Embodiments of the gaming machine of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. In each referenced figure, the same parts are given the same reference numerals, and overlapping explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In this specification, in order to simplify the description, by writing symbols or codes that refer to information, signals, physical quantities, parts, etc., the names of the information, signals, physical quantities, parts, etc. for the symbols or codes may be omitted or May be abbreviated. Furthermore, in any flowchart described below, the execution order of a plurality of processes in any plurality of steps can be arbitrarily changed or executed in parallel within a range that does not cause inconsistency in the processing contents.

1. Structure of the gaming machine The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 1 to 5. In the following description, the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 refer to the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Furthermore, "front" is the direction from the pachinko machine PY1 toward the player facing the pachinko machine PY1, and "back" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko machine PY1 toward the pachinko machine PY1. shall be.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a gaming machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine frame 2 includes an outer frame 22 and a front door 23 that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 22. Further, the front door 23 includes a game board mounting frame 2A to which a game board unit YU to be described later is attached, and a front frame 23m rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 2A via a hinge 2B. The front frame 23m can be opened and closed with respect to the game board mounting frame 2A. A transparent plate 23t is attached to the front frame 23m. When the front frame 23m is closed, the game board 1 attached to the game board mounting frame 2A and the transparent plate 23t face each other. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is installed in a game parlor (game parlor), a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY1 can see the game area 6 (game area) formed on the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. ) can be visually recognized. A transparent glass plate, a transparent synthetic resin plate, or the like can be used as the transparent plate 23t. It is sufficient if the gaming area 6 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to fire a game ball is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) corresponds to the magnitude (firing strength) of the force applied to the game ball to make the game ball fire (the amount by which the firing device 72, which will be described later, drives the firing solenoid). It is being Therefore, the game ball is fired with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotational operation of the handle 72k. Further, a lower decorative body 36 that largely protrudes forward is provided at the lower center of the front surface of the front frame 23m. An upper tray 34 for storing game balls to be supplied to the handle 72k is formed on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36. Further, a lower tray 35 is provided at the lower center of the front of the lower decorative body 36 for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 34.

An operable first input device (hereinafter referred to as "normal button") 40 is provided on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36 in front of the upper plate 34 . The normal button 40 is composed of, for example, a button having a pressing surface, a lever having a gripping part, or the like. Further, an operable second input device (hereinafter referred to as "special button") 41 is provided on the right decorative body 32 that is formed to protrude forward from the right edge of the front frame 23m. The special button 41 is composed of, for example, a button having a pressing surface, a lever having a gripping part, or the like.

Further, a speaker 52 capable of outputting sound is provided on the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31 that is formed to protrude forward from the upper part of the surface of the front frame 23m. The speaker 52 (sound output means) includes a left speaker 52L placed on the left side and a right speaker 52R placed on the right side. Further, frame lamps 53 capable of emitting light are provided on the right edge of the front frame 23m and on the left and right sides of the lower plate 35 in the front of the lower decorative body 36. Furthermore, a movable frame moving device 58 is attached above the left edge and right edge of the front frame 23m as a performance device for the purpose of increasing game interest. The frame moving device 58 includes a left frame moving device 58L arranged on the left side and a right frame moving device 58R arranged on the right side.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using mainly FIGS. 2 to 5. The game board unit YU includes a game board 1 and a performance unit 1U attached to the back side of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin board. An opening 1A is formed approximately in the center of the game board 1 and is approximately circular when viewed from the front. Along the opening 1A, a substantially ring-shaped inner wall 1B is formed to protrude forward and define a game area 6 through which game balls can flow. Further, on the outside of the inner wall portion 1B, a substantially ring-shaped outer wall portion 1C for partitioning the gaming area 6 is formed to protrude forward.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a game area 6 is formed which is surrounded by an inner wall part 1B, an outer wall part 1C, etc. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is partitioned into a game area 6 and other areas by the inner wall 1B and the outer wall 1C.

The game area 6 is an area into which game balls fired by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing games in the pachinko game machine PY1. Note that a large number of game nails (not shown) are provided protruding from the game area 6. The game nail allows game balls that enter the game area 6 and flow down the game area 6 to be controlled by a first starting port 11 (ball entry port), a second starting port 12 (ball entry port), a general winning port 10, which will be described later. It constitutes a route that appropriately guides the player to the gate 13, the first big winning hole 14, the second big winning hole 15 (special winning hole), etc. In addition, the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, the first big winning hole 11, the second big winning hole 15, and the general winning hole 10 correspond to the "winning hole".

In the gaming area 6, there is a first starting winning device 11D in which a first starting opening 11 into which a game ball can enter is formed, and a second starting winning device 11D that makes it possible or impossible for the ball to enter the second starting opening 12. A device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided.

The first starting winning device 11D is immovable. Therefore, the ease with which game balls enter the first starting port 11 remains constant (unchanged). Winning the game ball into the first starting hole 11 is achieved by drawing the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 1") (obtaining and determining a random number related to Special Figure 1, which will be described later: hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 1 Lottery"). ) and the variable display of special map 1. Furthermore, when the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The electric chew 12D includes an operable electric tube opening/closing member 12k. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is normally (in a normal state) in a closed position in which it is impossible or extremely difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 12. When the special state is reached, the game ball moves to the open position where the game ball can enter the second starting port 12. In this way, the movement of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k to the open position is also referred to as the "open state" of the second starting port 12 or the electric chew 12D, and only when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state, the game ball is moved to the second starting port 12. It is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, the state in which the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the closed position is also referred to as the "closed state" of the second starting port 12 or the electric chew 12D. Further, when the second starting port 12 or the electric tube 12D is in the "open state", it is also referred to as "the electric tube 12D is opened", and when the electric tube 12D is in the "closed state", it is also referred to as "the electric tube 12D is closed". ” is also called.

Winning a game ball into the second starting hole 12 is achieved by drawing a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 2") (obtaining and determining a random number related to Special Figure 2, which will be described later: hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 2 Lottery"). ) and the variable display of special map 2. Furthermore, when the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a general winning hole 10 into which game balls can enter. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the game area 6 is provided with a gate 13 through which game balls can pass. The passage of the game ball through the gate 13 is the trigger for the lottery of a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol") (that is, the acquisition and determination of a regular symbol random number: hereinafter referred to as "common symbol lottery") and the variable display of a regular symbol. It has become. The electric chew 12D is opened by executing the auxiliary game. That is, the auxiliary game is a game that involves opening the electric chew 12D.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a first big winning device 14D (hereinafter also referred to as "normal AT14D") in which a first big winning opening 14 into which a game ball can enter is formed.

The first big prize winning device 14D includes a normal AT opening/closing member 14k that can operate in an open state and a closed state. The first big prize opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the normal AT opening/closing member 14k. Normally, the AT opening/closing member 14k is normally in a closed state that closes the first big winning hole 14, and it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14. When the normal AT opening/closing member 14k operates in the open state, the game ball can enter the first big prize opening 14. In this way, the game ball can enter the first grand prize opening 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When a game ball enters the first grand prize opening 14, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a guiding stage 12g that guides the gaming ball to the second starting port 12. In addition, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide stage 12g can flow down toward the second starting port 12.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a second grand prize winning device 15D (hereinafter also referred to as "VAT 15D") in which a second grand prize opening 15 into which game balls can enter is formed. The second big winning device 15D (special winning means) includes an operable VAT opening/closing member 15k. The VAT opening/closing member 15k normally closes the second grand prize opening 15, and it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 15. The VAT opening/closing member 15k can take an open state. When the VAT opening/closing member 15k is in the open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 15. On the other hand, the state in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k closes the second grand prize opening 15 is also referred to as a "closed state". In this way, the second big prize opening 15 is opened and closed by the operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k. When the game balls enter the second grand prize opening 15, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, the second grand prize winning device 15D will be explained in detail using FIG. 3. Inside the second big prize winning device 15D, there is a gate-shaped second big winning hole sensor 15a (special A winning opening detection means) is provided.

A specific area 16 (specific area) and a non-specific area 17 (non-specific area) through which the game ball can pass (enter) are provided in the downstream area of the second big prize opening sensor 15a. The game balls that have passed through the second big prize opening sensor 15a are sorted into a specific area 16 or a non-specific area 17 by a sorting device 16D. The sorting device 16D includes a sorting member 16k made of a substantially rectangular flat plate, and a sorting solenoid 16s that drives the sorting member 16k. The distribution member 16k is configured to be slidable left and right by driving the distribution solenoid 16s.

When the distribution solenoid 16s is not energized, the distribution member 16k is in the first state (passage prevention state: the left end of the distribution member 16k when viewed from the front in FIG. 3(A) is located slightly to the right of the left end of the specific area 16, and the distribution member 16k covers the specific area 16 directly above it. When the distribution member 16k is in the first state, it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 to pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. It is difficult and passes through a non-specific area 17. The route of the game ball flowing down from this second big prize opening 15 to the non-specific area 17 is called a first route.

On the other hand, when the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, the distribution member 16k is in a second state (passage permission state: in a front view of FIG. 3(B)) in which the game ball is allowed to pass (enter) the specific area 16. The left end of the distribution member 16k is located slightly to the left of the right end of the specific area 16, and the distribution member 16k does not cover the specific area 16 directly above it, leaving the area directly above the specific area 16 open. When the distribution member 16k is in the second state, the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 can easily pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. The route of the game ball flowing down from this second big prize opening 15 to the specific area 16 is called a second route.

Note that basically, the distribution member 16k is held in the first state. That is, it can be said that the first state is the normal state of the distribution member 16k. Then, only in a predetermined round game (for example, 10R), the distribution solenoid 16s is energized and can change to the second state.

The specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17 include a specific area sensor 16a (specific area detection means) that detects the game ball that has passed through (entered) each area 16 and 17 and causes the game ball to pass downward, and a non-specific area sensor. 17a (non-specific area detection means) is provided.

Note that it is possible to provide only one of the first grand prize device 14D and the second grand prize device 15D within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, at approximately the bottom of the gaming area 6, two out ports 19 are provided for discharging game balls that are hit into the gaming area 6 but do not win in any of the winning holes to the outside of the gaming area 6. There is. Furthermore, the game board 1 is provided with a board lamp 54 that can emit light.

By the way, the game area 6 in which the game balls can flow down can be divided into a left game area (first game area) on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area (second game area) on the right side. The manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area is referred to as "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, the manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area is referred to as "right-handed hitting". In the pachinko game machine PY1, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with the left hand is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with the right hand. The possible flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first passage R1 and the second passage R2 are also constituted by a large number of game nails.

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the first channel R1 by hitting the ball to the left. On the other hand, on the second flow path R2, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, a first big winning port 14, and a second big winning port 15 are provided. Therefore, by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting right, the player can pass through the gate 13, enter the second starting opening 12, the first big winning opening 14, or the second You can aim to win the big prize opening 15.

In addition, game balls that did not enter any of the winning holes (first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, general winning hole 10, first big winning hole 14, and second big winning hole 15), It is guided to the out port 19 and discharged. Further, the number of prize balls that are won in each winning hole can be set as appropriate.

Furthermore, a display device 8 is arranged below and to the left of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (a portion other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the displays 8 include a special figure 1 display 81a that variably displays special figure 1, a special figure 2 display 81b that variably displays special figure 2, and a special figure 2 display 81b that variably displays general figure 1. A general figure display 82 is included. In addition, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 pending display 83a that displays the number of special figure 1 pending (U1: the number of variable displays of special figure 1 on the special figure 1 display 81a), which will be described later. Also included is a special figure 2 pending display 83b that displays the number of special figure 2 pending (U2: the number of reserved special figures 2 that is variablely displayed by the special figure 2 indicator 81b), which will be described later.

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is held in response to the landing of a game ball into the first starting port 11. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is held in response to the winning of a game ball into the second starting port 12. In addition, in the following explanation, the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are collectively called the special drawing, and the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 lottery are collectively called the special drawing drawing. Moreover, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as the special figure display 81. Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b are collectively referred to as the special figure reservation display 83.

The variable display of the special drawings notifies the results of the special drawing lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed variably and then stopped. The special figure that is stopped and displayed (stop special figure, special figure derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one special figure selected from a plurality of types of special figures by a special figure lottery. When the stopping special symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (a special symbol with a specific stopping pattern, that is, a jackpot symbol), the grand prize opening (the first grand prize opening 14 and the second grand prize opening 15) is opened. A jackpot game (an example of a special game) is played.

The special figure display 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged side by side, and displays a special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), the special drawing display 81 will display "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, A jackpot symbol consisting of the lighting of the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th LEDs from the left is displayed, such as (: off). In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, the special drawing display 81 will display a losing pattern consisting of only the LED on the far right lighting up, such as "■■■■■■■□" do. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a losing symbol.

Furthermore, in the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the special figure is performed for a predetermined variable time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode of the special figure is, for example, a mode in which each LED lights up so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. Note that the manner of variable display of the special figure is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as when all LEDs flash at once unless each LED is displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific manner).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball hits the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, various random numbers (numerical information and judgment information) are generated for special drawing drawings, etc. example) may be obtained. These various random numbers are temporarily stored in a special figure reservation storage unit 105, which will be described later, as a special figure reservation. In addition, in the following, the various random numbers obtained by winning (balls entering) the game ball into the first starting port 11 are referred to as "special drawing 1 related random numbers", and the various random numbers obtained by winning the game ball into the second starting port 12 The various random numbers obtained by (ball entry) are referred to as "special map 2 related random numbers." Here, the special figure 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 reservations that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a (number of special figure 1 reservations) and the number of special figure 2 reservations that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (number of special figure 2 reservations). It is possible to set an upper limit (for example, 4). In addition, hereinafter, the special map 1 reservation and the special map 2 reservation are collectively referred to as "special map reservation", and the number of special diagrams 1 and 2 reserved are collectively referred to as "the number of special diagrams reserved". In addition, the special figure 1 related random numbers and the special figure 2 related random numbers are collectively referred to as "special figure related random numbers."

In the pachinko game machine PY1, if the variable display of the special figure is not performed immediately after the game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, specifically, while the variable display of the special figure is being executed. If a prize is won during the execution of a jackpot game (special game), the variable display of the special drawing (or the right to draw the special drawing) for the winning can be reserved. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage section 105 is consumed when variable display of the special figure based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. That is, extinguishing the special figure reservation means determining the special figure related random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation and executing variable display of the special figure to show the determination result.

Then, the special figure reservation number is displayed on the special figure reservation display 83. Each of the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of special symbols reserved by lighting up the LEDs for the number of special symbols reserved. Is possible.

In addition, the variable display of the general map notifies the result of the general map lottery. In the variable display of a general map, the general map is displayed variably and then stopped. The general map that is stopped and displayed (the stationary general map, the general map derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one general map selected from among a plurality of types of general maps by lottery. If the stopped and displayed general figure is a predetermined specific ordinary figure (ordinary figure with a predetermined stop mode, that is, a winning symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 12 (electric chew 12D) is opened. .

The common map display device 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays the common map according to the result of the general map lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. When the result of the common symbol lottery is a win, the common symbol display 82 displays a winning symbol consisting of both LEDs lighting up, such as "□□" (□: lit, ■: off). If the result of the lottery is a loss, a loss pattern such as "■□" consisting of only the right LED being lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate.

Further, before the regular map is stopped and displayed, the regular map is variablely displayed for a predetermined variable time. The mode of variable display of the ordinary map is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are lit alternately. Note that the mode of variable display of the general map is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as when all LEDs flash at once, unless each LED is displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). .

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball passes through the gate 13, a regular symbol random number (an example of numerical information or determination information) for performing a regular symbol lottery may be acquired. This random number is stored in the below-mentioned normal pattern holding storage section 106 on the condition that the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not executed. It is possible to set an upper limit (for example, 4 pieces) to the number of general drawings that can be stored in the general drawing holding storage unit 106 (number of general drawings pending). In addition, below, the normal pattern random number acquired by the game ball passing through the gate 13 is also referred to as the "normal pattern related random number."

Next, the performance unit 1U attached to the back of the game board 1 will be explained using FIG. The production unit 1U is a unit made up of a plurality of devices that mainly perform production. The performance unit 1U is equipped with an image display device 50, a first board movable device (hereinafter referred to as "on board movable device") 55, and a second board movable device (hereinafter referred to as "bottom board movable device") 56.

The image display device 50 is composed of, for example, a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, a dot display, a 7-segment display, etc., and includes a display screen 50a (display section) capable of displaying patterns and the like.

The on-board movable device 55 is disposed in front of the display screen 50a, is movable along the display screen 50a, and includes a decorated on-board movable body 55k. The underboard movable device 56 is disposed in front of the display screen 50a, is movable along the display screen 50a, and includes a decorated underboard movable body 56k.

FIG. 5A schematically shows how the above-panel movable body 55k and the under-panel movable body 56k are held in a normal standby state (initial position) in which they are not in operation. When the drive source of the above-board movable device 55 is driven, the above-board movable body 55k moves downward (down), and when the drive source of the under-board movable device 56 is driven, the under-board movable body 56k moves upward (raised). do. At this time, the image display device 50 is covered by the lowered on-board movable body 55k or the raised under-board movable body 56k, and the image display device 50 becomes difficult to see.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained based on FIGS. 6 to 9. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has various functions such as a special drawing lottery, a variable display of special drawings, a jackpot game, a game state setting described later, a general drawing drawing, a variable display of a general drawing, and auxiliary games. A game control board (hereinafter also referred to as "main control board") 100 that controls gaming profits (progress of the game), and game performances (special figure fluctuation performance, hold performance, jackpot game) according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100 A performance control board that controls performances such as a customer waiting performance, an operation promotion performance that prompts operations during the period when the operation of the normal button 40 and special button 41 is valid (operation valid period), hereinafter also referred to as a "sub control board" ) 120, a payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc., are provided on the back side further than the image display device 50 of the game board 1 (see FIG. 8). The main control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section that controls games. Further, the effect control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control section that controls effects, together with an image control board 140, a lamp control circuit 151, and an audio control circuit 161, which will be described later. The production control unit includes at least a production control board 120, and controls game production using production means (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, etc.), It is sufficient if the waiting effect and the operation promotion effect can be controlled.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a power supply board 190. The power supply board 190 supplies power to the main control board 100, the production control board 120, and the payout control board 170, and also supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. The power supply board 190 is provided with a RAM clear switch 191 that can be pressed down. When the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 191 (specific operation means) clears gaming information (for example, information on gaming states such as high probability states, This is for clearing the gaming CPU 102 (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear") (information such as the number of reserved special drawings and the result of determining whether the jackpot is correct or not). As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on a power supply board 190 placed on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 191 cannot be operated unless the person is an employee of the game parlor who can open and close the front door 23. That is, the RAM clear switch 191 can be said to be an operating means that cannot be operated by the player. When the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 191 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on the power supply board 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 191 can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be provided on the main control board 100 or a dedicated board. It's okay.

Further, the power supply board 190 is provided with a backup power supply circuit 192. The backup power supply circuit 192 supplies power to the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120, which will be described later, when power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the information stored in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 is retained even when the power is cut off to the pachinko game machine PY1. Further, a power switch 193 is connected to the power supply board 190. The ON or OFF operation of the power switch 193 switches the power on or off. In addition, the main control board 100 may be provided with a backup power supply circuit for the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100, or the production control board 120 may be provided with a backup power supply circuit for the production RAM 124 of the production control board 120.

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 100 is equipped with a one-chip microcomputer for game control (hereinafter referred to as "microcomputer for game control") 101 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. The gaming control microcomputer 101 includes a gaming ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a gaming RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in a gaming ROM 103 is included.

The gaming ROM 103 stores programs for performing main control main processing, main side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. In addition, the gaming ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a hit determination table, and a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, which will be described later. , auxiliary game control table, etc. are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

The gaming RAM 104 is provided with the above-mentioned special symbol reservation storage section 105, regular symbol reservation storage section 106, and the like. Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a non-erasable storage section 107, and the non-erasable storage section 107 is provided with a total prize ball number storage section 107a, a total fired ball number storage section 107b, and a difference ball number storage section 107c. It is being In the non-erasable storage section 107, even if RAM clear is executed, the gaming CPU 102 does not erase the stored contents. The non-erasable storage unit 107 (total prize ball number storage unit 107a, total fired ball number storage unit 107b, difference ball number storage unit 107c) will be described in detail later.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a 7-segment display 300, a setting key cylinder 180, and a special reset switch 181 (special operation means) (see FIG. 8). As shown in FIG. 9, the 7-segment display 300 is a so-called 4-segment 7-segment display, and includes a total of 32 lighting (light-emitting) parts. Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 includes, in order from left to right, a first display area 310, a second display area 320, a third display area 330, and a fourth display area 340. The four display areas 310, 320, 330, and 340 each have eight lighting parts (LED elements) LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, so that they can each represent numbers from "0" to "9". It has LB17 to LB24 and LB25 to LB32. Display control of the 7-segment display 300 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

The setting key cylinder 180 functions as an operating means when setting a setting value corresponding to the jackpot determination probability. The interior of the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated between an initial position and a rotational position with a setting key (not shown) inserted therein. Therefore, in this pachinko game machine PY1, by rotating the setting key cylinder 180 to the rotation position and turning on the power while pressing and operating the RAM clear switch 191, the machine shifts to a setting mode in which setting values can be set. can do. In this setting mode, the setting value can be set to "1". However, in this pachinko gaming machine PY1, only one type of setting value, "1", is provided. Therefore, the set value cannot be changed from "1". Note that when the setting mode is set, if the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting mode is ended and RAM clear is executed.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a special reset switch 181 that can be pressed down. As shown in FIG. 8, the special reset switch 181 is provided on the main control board 100 placed on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1. Therefore, the special reset switch 181 cannot be operated unless the person is an employee of the gaming hall who can open and close the front door 23. That is, the special reset switch 181 can be said to be an operating means that cannot be operated by the player. The function of the special reset switch 181 will be explained in detail later. Furthermore, a gaming I/O (Input/Output) port section 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals is mounted on the main control board.

Various sensors MS and various actuators MA are connected to the main control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors MS are input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 also outputs signals to various actuators MA.

The various sensors MS connected to the main control board 100 include a first starting port sensor 11a that detects game balls that have entered the first starting port 11, and a first starting port sensor 11a that detects game balls that have entered the second starting port 12. 2 starting hole sensor 12a, general winning hole sensor 10a that detects the game ball that has entered the general winning hole 10, gate sensor 13a that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 13, and the game ball that has entered the first grand prize hole 14. The first big winning hole sensor 14a detects, the second big winning hole sensor 15a detects the game ball that entered the second big winning hole 15, and the game ball that passed through the specific area 16 (entered the specific area 16). It includes a specific area sensor 16a and a non-specific area sensor 17a that detects a game ball that has passed through a non-specific area 17 (entered the non-specific area 17).

Further, the various sensors MS include an outlet sensor that detects all the game balls (total number of shot balls) flowing down the game area 6. Here, the game balls that have flowed down to the outside of the game area 6 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine PY1 through a discharge path (not shown) provided at the lower part of the game board mounting frame 2. Therefore, the discharge port sensor is provided within the discharge path. Further, the various sensors MS include a magnetic sensor that detects illegal magnetism. The magnetic sensor detects the magnetism generated when a player uses a magnet or the like to illegally enter a game ball into the various winning holes 10, 11, 12, 14, and 15. When each of the above-mentioned sensors detects a game ball, it outputs a signal according to the detected content to the main control board 100.

Further, the various sensors MS include a front door open sensor that detects opening of the front door 23 to the outer frame 22, and a front frame sensor that detects opening of the front frame 23m to the game board mounting frame 2A. . When the front door open sensor detects that the front door 23 is opened, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detected content. When the front frame sensor detects the opening of the front frame 23m, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detected content. Note that the type and number of sensors connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

In addition, the various actuators MA connected to the main control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s that drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D, and a normal AT opening/closing member 14k of the first big winning device 14D. Includes a first big winning opening solenoid 14s, a second big winning opening solenoid 15s that drives the VAT opening/closing member 15k of the second big winning device 15D, and a sorting solenoid 16s that drives the sorting member 16k of the sorting device 16D. It is. Note that the type and number of actuators connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the main control board 100 is connected to displays 8 (a special figure display 81, a regular figure display 82, and a special figure pending display 83). Display control of these displays 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

The main control board 100 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for monitoring payout. The payout control board 170 includes a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card) and a prize ball payout device 73. The firing device 72 is also connected via the firing control circuit 175. Note that the firing device 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 pays out prize balls using the prize ball payout device 73 and the rental ball payout device 74 based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. and pay out rental balls. Specifically, the prize ball motor 73m of the prize ball payout device 73 is driven to pay out prize balls or pay out rental balls. The number of game balls to be paid out is detected by the prize ball sensor 73a for counting, and a detection signal by the prize ball sensor 73a is output to the payout control board 170.

Further, the firing device 72 is provided with a touch switch that can detect the contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k (see FIG. 1). When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170. Further, the firing device 72 is connected to a firing volume knob 72b that can detect the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The firing device 72 drives the firing solenoid 72s so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the firing volume knob 72b. In the pachinko game machine PY1, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds while the rotational operation of the handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the payout control board 170 is connected to the external terminal board 160. That is, the external terminal board 160 is connected to the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. The external terminal board 160 is for transmitting an outer end signal transmitted from the main control board 100 to an external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) provided outside the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The information included in the outer end signal includes, for example, information indicating whether a jackpot has been won, information on the gaming status, and information indicating an error or fraud (abnormality). Although the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal to the external unit GU through parallel communication, the outer end signal may be transmitted through asynchronous serial communication (common asynchronous serial communication port). Furthermore, although the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170, the main control board 100 may be connected to the external terminal board 160 via a board other than the payout control board 170 (for example, a relay board). Alternatively, the main control board 100 and the external terminal board 160 may be directly connected.

Further, the main control board 100 transmits various commands including information regarding the game to the production control board 120 in accordance with the progress of the game. The production control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the main control board 100 based on various commands sent from the main control board 100. The connection between the main control board 100 and the performance control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 120. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 100 and the production control board 120 as a communication direction regulating means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "performance control microcomputer") 121 that controls the performance of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 121 (performance control means) includes a performance ROM 123 that stores programs etc. for controlling the performance as the game progresses by the main control board 100, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and A performance CPU 122 that executes a program stored in a performance ROM 123 is included.

In addition, the performance RAM 124 includes a performance total prize ball storage section 124a that stores information on the total number of prize balls, a performance total number of fired balls storage section 124b that stores information on the total number of fired balls, and a performance total number of fired balls storage section 124b that stores information on the total number of fired balls. An effect difference ball number storage section 124c for storing information is provided.

Furthermore, the production ROM 123 stores programs for performing sub-control main processing, reception interrupt processing, sub-side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

Furthermore, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance I/O port section 138 for inputting and outputting data and signals, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 139. The RTC 139 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 139 operates on the power when the pachinko game machine PY1 is supplied with power from a predetermined island power supply device (not shown), and when the power is not supplied from the island power supply device, the power supply board 190 operates. It operates using power supplied from a backup power supply circuit 192 provided therein. Therefore, the RTC 139 can measure the current date and time even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is not turned on. Note that a backup power supply circuit for the RTC 139 may be provided on the production control board 120. A circuit including a capacitor and a built-in battery (such as a button battery) can be used as the backup power supply circuit.

An image control board 140 is connected to the production control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 of the performance control board 120 controls the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to control the image display device based on commands received from the main control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100. 50 display control is performed. Note that the connection between the production control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both the transmission of signals from the production control board 120 to the image control board 140 and the transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the production control board 120. This is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, a VRAM 146 used for expanding the image data stored in the CGROM 145, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. It is equipped with Of course, all or part of these electronic components may be configured on one chip. The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images displayed on the image display device 50 image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in a development area in the VRAM 146 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display screen 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, and image transmittance.

The performance control microcomputer 121 outputs audio, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 based on commands received from the main control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100. Output.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120. Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be used as a board and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140, and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various switches serving as input units, various actuators SA serving as drive sources, and various lamps SL are connected to the production control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various switches are input to the performance control board 120. Moreover, the production control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators SA. Further, the effect control board 120 controls the lighting of various lamps SL via the lamp control circuit 151 based on commands received from the main control board 100.

Various switches connected to the production control board 120 include a normal button detection switch 40a and a special button detection switch 41a. The normal button detection switch 40a detects that the normal button 40 is pressed. The special button detection switch 41a detects that the special button 41 has been pressed. Each detection switch 40a, 41a outputs a signal according to the detected content to the production control board 120. Note that the type and number of switches connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators SA connected to the production control board 120 include motors that drive the above-board movable device 55, the below-board movable device 56, the frame moveable device 58, etc. (for example, the above-board drive motor 55m, the under-board drive motor 56m). , frame drive motor 58m), and it is possible to drive each movable device to perform a predetermined operation by driving the motor. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of each movable device, and controls the operation of each movable device via the lamp control circuit 151. Note that the type and number of actuators connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Various lamps SL connected to the effect control board 120 include a frame lamp 53, a board lamp 54, etc., and each lamp is made to emit light. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp, and controls the light emission of each lamp according to the light emission pattern data. Control. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Note that a CPU may be mounted using the lamp control circuit 151 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may control the lighting of each lamp and control the operation of each movable device. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM. Further, the type and number of lamps connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

3. Main games played by the gaming machine Next, main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 10 to 15.

3-1. Games related to common figures First, games related to common figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a regular lottery when the fired game ball passes through the gate 13. When the general drawing lottery is performed, the normal drawing is displayed variably (variably displayed and then stopped) on the general drawing display 82. Here, the regular symbols that are stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the regular pattern is also called "losing pattern" to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern described later. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing common map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. In addition, hereinafter, the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not being played will be referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation starting condition."

Pachinko game machine PY1 acquires a random number related to a common pattern when a basic pattern fluctuation starting condition is satisfied when performing such a series of games (general pattern lottery, variable display of normal pattern, auxiliary game). As shown in FIG. 10(A), the obtained ordinary symbol-related random numbers include ordinary symbol random numbers. The normal symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for determining a hit. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. Win Determination The win determination is a determination for determining whether or not there is a win (whether or not to execute the auxiliary game) using one or more hit determination tables as shown in FIG. 11(A). The hit determination table can be associated with a gaming state that will be described later. In other words, the gaming state includes a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state, and the hit determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving hit determination table) and the hit determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving It is possible to distinguish between the hit determination table) and the hit determination table. In each hit determination table, determination values of normal symbol random numbers (normal symbol random number values) are assigned to hits and losses that are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table to determine whether it is a hit or a loss. Then, based on the result of the hit determination, a normal pattern variation pattern is determined for variable display of the normal pattern. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, basically the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, basically the losing common map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. Furthermore, the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Ordinary figure fluctuation The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern using one or more ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination tables as shown in FIG. 11(B). The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern is identification information regarding predetermined matters related to variable display of ordinary figures, such as ordinary figure fluctuation time.

The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state. In other words, the regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table includes a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state, and a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the time saving state. It is possible to distinguish between the short-time regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) and the short-time regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table.

Each ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table stores one ordinary figure fluctuation pattern, which is the result of ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination, for each ordinary figure to be stopped. That is, the pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of making the normal pattern fluctuation time different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol (losing common symbol) is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined such that the common symbol fluctuation time is, for example, 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is Regarding the variable display of ordinary figures in the case where the ordinary figures are stopped and displayed, a general figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is, for example, 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined such that the common symbol fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined. Regarding the variable display of figures, a general figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds. A variable display of the ordinary figure of the ordinary figure fluctuation time corresponding to the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determined by this determination is performed on the ordinary figure display 82. Further, these regular figure fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the normal pattern is variably displayed on the normal pattern display 82.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game The auxiliary game is a variable display of a common symbol, and is executed when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of a common symbol lottery).

The auxiliary game includes various elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game components), such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Each of these elements is associated with a gaming state. Pachinko game machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game based on the game state using one or more auxiliary game control tables as shown in FIG. 11(C). The auxiliary game control table is associated with the game state. Each auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. Further, the number of openings and opening time for each of these elements can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY1 can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state and the auxiliary game in the time-saving state. For example, in an auxiliary game in a non-time-saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a first opening time (a time during which it is difficult to make the game ball enter the electric chew 12D (for example, 0.08 seconds)). Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as the "short opening auxiliary game". In addition, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a second opening time that is longer than the first opening time (a time during which it is easy to make the game ball enter the electric chew 12D (for example, 3.00 seconds)). Open. Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as the "long opening auxiliary game".

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a special drawing 1 lottery when the fired game ball enters the first starting slot 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is carried out, the special figure 1 is displayed variably on the special figure 1 display 81a (stop display after a variable display is performed) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special symbol 1 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. That is, the results of the special drawing 1 lottery include jackpots and losses. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. On the other hand, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY1 performs the special drawing 2 lottery when the fired game ball enters the second starting slot 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 is displayed variably on the special figure 2 display 81b (stopped display after a variable display) to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special symbols 2 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the result of the special drawing 2 lottery includes a jackpot and a loss. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize is ended. On the other hand, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

In addition, below, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, it is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 12, it is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". That's what it means. Further, "the first starting condition is met" and "the second starting condition is met" are collectively referred to as "the starting condition is met." In addition, the losing symbols of the special symbols are also referred to as "losing special symbols" to distinguish them from the losing symbols of the above-mentioned ordinary symbols.

Pachinko game machine PY1 acquires a special pattern-related random number when a starting condition is established in order to play a series of games like this (special pattern lottery, variable display of special pattern, jackpot game, and setting of the game state). Perform various judgments regarding random numbers. As shown in FIG. 10(B), the special pattern related random numbers to be obtained include special pattern random numbers (jackpot random numbers), jackpot pattern type random numbers, reach random numbers, and special pattern fluctuation pattern random numbers. The special symbol random number is a random number for determining a jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number for determining reach. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Note that the random number is sometimes referred to as determination information.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment Jackpot Judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not it is a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game) using one or more jackpot judgment tables as shown in FIG. 12(A). The gaming states include a normal probability state and a high probability state, and the jackpot determination table is associated with whether the game is in the normal probability state or the high probability state. That is, as a jackpot judgment table, it is possible to distinguish between a jackpot judgment table used in a normal probability state (normal probability jackpot judgment table) and a jackpot judgment table used in a high probability state (high probability jackpot judgment table). It is possible.

In each jackpot determination table, special symbol random number determination values (special symbol random number values) are assigned to jackpots and losses that are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired special symbol random number with the jackpot determination table to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 12(A), the high probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal probability jackpot determination table. Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination In the jackpot symbol type determination, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type (jackpot symbol type) is determined by using one or more jackpot symbol type determination tables as shown in FIG. ). For each type of jackpot symbol, it is possible to associate the content of the jackpot, in other words, the constituent elements of the jackpot consisting of game benefits given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table is associated with the type of the special symbol that is variably displayed, in other words, the type of the starting opening where the prize was won due to the jackpot symbol type determination (which caused the jackpot symbol type determination to occur). is possible. That is, as the jackpot symbol type determination table, there is a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing a variable display of special figure 1, and a jackpot symbol type determination table used when performing a variable display of special figure 2. It is possible to distinguish between the symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

There are multiple types of jackpot symbols, and in each jackpot symbol type determination table, the judgment value of the jackpot symbol type random number (jackpot symbol type random number value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. There is. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired jackpot symbol type random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. Further, the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12(B), the distribution ratio of the jackpot symbol type based on the jackpot symbol type determination for special symbol 1 is set to 50% for jackpot symbol X and 50% for jackpot symbol Y, and for special symbol 2. It is possible for the jackpot symbol Z to make the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type 100% based on the jackpot symbol type determination. In this way, the jackpot symbol type is determined in the special drawing 1 lottery, which is held when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 11, and the special drawing 2 drawing, which is held when a gaming ball is won in the second starting opening 12. It is possible to have different fractions.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment Reach judgment determines whether or not to generate a reach with the special symbol variation effect described later, using one or more reach judgment tables as shown in FIG. 12(C) when the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss. This is a judgment to determine whether

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state. In other words, the reach determination table is distinguished between a reach determination table used in a non-time saving state (non-time saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in a time saving state (time saving reach determination table). Is possible.

In each reach judgment table, the judgment value of the reach random number (random value of reach establishment) is divided into the reach judgment results ``with reach (reach occurs)'' and ``no reach (reach does not occur)''. There is. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 compares the acquired reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether there is a reach or no reach (whether or not to generate a reach). As shown in FIG. 12(C), the number of reach establishment random values that are determined as "reach exists (reach occurs)" can be made different between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. It is possible. In addition, in the following, "with reach (generates reach)", which is performed on the assumption that the result of the jackpot judgment is "loss", is referred to as "loss with reach", and "without reach (does not cause reach)" is referred to as "loss with reach". )” is sometimes referred to as “no-reach loss.”

3-2-4. Special pattern fluctuation To determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern, use one or more special pattern fluctuation pattern determination tables (special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) as shown in Figures 13 to 14 to determine the fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern (Special figure fluctuation pattern) This is a judgment to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern, and is carried out in both cases where the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot or a loss. The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters regarding the special figure variation time and the production flow (production content) of the special figure variation production described later. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern can include identification information regarding the result of jackpot determination and the result of reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow (performance content) of the special symbol variation performance. As the special figure variation pattern, it is possible to use a plurality of types of special figure variation patterns each having different identification information, and the number thereof can be changed as appropriate.

The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the type of special symbol that is variablely displayed as a determination target, in other words, the type of the starting opening where the winning is made due to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination. That is, as the special figure variation pattern judgment table, there is a special figure variation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table: Fig. 13) used when performing variable display of special figure 1, and a variable display of special figure 2. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 14) that is sometimes used.

Each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can also be associated with the gaming state. In other words, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state, and a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. It is possible to distinguish between the fluctuation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table). On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table, there is also a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the non-time saving state (special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for non-time saving) and a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

Further, each special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state can be further associated with a jackpot determination result, a jackpot symbol type determination result, or a reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each include one for jackpot (for each jackpot symbol type), one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach. Similarly, the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each include one for jackpot (for each jackpot symbol type), one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach.

Furthermore, each special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for no reach loss can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures. For example, there is a special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 0 to 2, and a table that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses. In addition, each special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for no-reach loss can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures. For example, the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no reach loss is used when the special pattern 2 reservation number (U2) is 0 to 2, and the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table is used when the special pattern 2 reservation number (U2) is 3 to 4. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no-reach loss.

Then, variable display of the special figure of the special figure fluctuation time according to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined by each special figure fluctuation pattern judgment is performed on the special figure display 81. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not immediately performed, and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Ru.

Further, each special figure variation pattern can be associated with a production flow of a special figure variation production as shown in the second column from the right in the table of FIGS. 13 to 14.

In addition, as shown in the rightmost column of the tables in Figures 13 and 14, names can be attached to the special figure fluctuation patterns in association with the special figure (jackpot determination result) and the production content of the special figure fluctuation effect. be. For example, a special pattern fluctuation pattern related to a jackpot is called a "jackpot fluctuation." On the other hand, a special symbol fluctuation pattern in which SP reach, which is a type of reach, is performed in a loss with reach is called "SP loss fluctuation", and a special pattern in which L reach, which is a type of reach, is performed in loss with reach. The figure variation pattern is called "L loss variation", and the special figure variation pattern in which the special figure variation effect ends with N reach, which is a type of reach, is called "N loss variation", which is a loss with reach. Such a special pattern variation pattern is referred to as a "normal loss variation."

3-2-5. Pre-reading determination Pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs pre-reading determination using one or more pre-reading determination tables as shown in FIG. 15, based on the acquired special figure related random numbers. The look-ahead determination includes, for example, determining whether the special symbol random number is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination, determining which jackpot symbol type the jackpot symbol type random number is determined to be in the jackpot symbol type determination, and determining whether the special symbol random number is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot symbol type determination. There is a determination as to which special figure variation pattern the figure variation pattern random number is determined to be in the special figure variation pattern determination. The pre-reading determination table can be associated with the type of starting opening related to the starting prize. That is, as the pre-reading determination table, there is a pre-reading determination table (first pre-reading determination table) when a prize is won in the first starting opening 11, and a pre-reading determining table (second pre-reading determination table) when winning in the second starting opening 12. , it is possible to distinguish between

Further, the pre-reading determination table can also be associated with the gaming state. In other words, the look-ahead determination table is distinguished between a look-ahead decision table used in a non-time-saving state (non-time-saving look-ahead decision table) and a look-ahead decision table used in a time-saving state (time-saving look-ahead decision table). Is possible.

In other words, the look-ahead determination table includes a first look-ahead decision table used in the non-time saving state, a first look-ahead decision table used in the time save state, and a second look-ahead decision table used in the non-time save state. It is possible to distinguish between the second prefetch determination table used in the time saving state and the second prefetch determination table used in the time saving state. Note that what kind of determination is included in the prefetch determination can be changed as appropriate.

3-3. Jackpot Game Next, the jackpot game will be explained. A jackpot game consists of multiple round games involving the opening and closing of the jackpot (first jackpot 14 or second jackpot 15), and a round game from the start of the jackpot until the start of the first round. It includes an opening (also written as OP) and an ending (also written as ED) from the end of the final round game until the end of the jackpot game. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending. Furthermore, it is possible to not provide OP and ED. Note that hereinafter, a predetermined number of round games (in a predetermined order) will be simply referred to as a "round." For example, the first round game is called "1 round (1R)," and the 10th round game is called "10 rounds (10R)."

The elements constituting such a jackpot game (jackpot game constituent elements) include the number of round games, the number of openings of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 14 or second big winning hole 15) in each round game, Includes the type and opening time of each opening (opening pattern), the time to be closed until the next opening (closing time), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time). ing. After the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the pachinko game machine PY1 controls the jackpot game using one or more jackpot game control tables as shown in FIG. The jackpot game control table stores jackpot game components for each jackpot game. As the jackpot game, it is possible to control one or more types of jackpot games.

For example, as shown in FIG. 16, from 1R to 9R, the first grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or the first grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. An open round game will be played. In 10R (final round), a round game in which the second grand prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or a round game in which the second grand prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds is played. It will be done. In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are detected by the big winning hole sensor, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning holes 14 and 15 has elapsed, End the round game.

Further, the number of times and time for each element can be changed as appropriate. Further, the jackpot game can be played using both the first big winning hole 14 and the second big winning hole 15, or only one of them.

Here, the specific area 16 will be explained in detail. The specific area 16 has a closed state in which prizes cannot be won and an open state in which prizes can be won by the distribution member 16k, so the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be said to be the opening and closing mode of the specific area 16. In the following, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k will also be referred to as the "opening/closing mode of the specific area 16." In this way, the distribution member 16k is controlled in a constant operating manner (the specific area 16 is opened/closed in a constant manner), but the distribution member 16k is controlled in a constant operational manner (the specific area 16 is opened/closed in a constant manner). In combination with the opening/closing mode of the second big prize opening 15 in the jackpot game, the difficulty (ease) of letting the game ball enter the specific area 16 in the jackpot game is set. Note that, hereinafter, the state in which the specific region 16 is in an open state is also referred to as "V open".

For 15 seconds after the opening of the second big prize opening starts, the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, and the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state (FIG. 3(B)). Therefore, in a round game in which the second big prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second big prize opening 15, the time and the period during which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state. From the relationship with the timing, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to cause the game ball to enter the specific area 16). On the other hand, in a round game in which the second big winning hole 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second big winning hole 15, and the time and timing during which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state. Due to the relationship with timing, it is almost impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to cause the game ball to enter the specific area 16). In this way, during the jackpot game, the VAT opening/closing member is used in the first opening pattern (V long opening pattern) that allows the game ball to easily pass through the specific area 16 (hereinafter also referred to as "V passage"). The VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in a jackpot game in which the game ball 15k and the distribution member 16k operate, and in a second opening pattern (V short opening pattern) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16. It is possible to execute a jackpot game. A jackpot game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in the V-long opening pattern as described above is called a "V-long jackpot." On the other hand, a jackpot game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in a V-short opening pattern is referred to as a "V-short jackpot".

The game control microcomputer 101 of this embodiment can execute various jackpot games (jackpot game X, jackpot game Y, jackpot game Z) shown in the jackpot game control table of FIG. 16.

As shown in FIG. 16, the game control microcomputer 101 of this embodiment selects "jackpot symbol or "jackpot symbol Y" can be determined. More specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the "jackpot symbol X" at a rate of 50% and the "jackpot symbol Y" at a rate of 50%. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 can determine the "jackpot symbol Z" in the jackpot symbol type determination in the special symbol 2 determination process (the special symbol determination process based on winning in the second starting opening 12). More specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the "jackpot symbol Z" at a rate of 100%.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 of the first embodiment executes a jackpot game according to the determined type of jackpot symbol. Specifically, in the "jackpot game X" that is executed when the "jackpot symbol X" is determined, the round game is played 10 times. From 1R to 4R, the first big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game, and from 5R to 9R, the first prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per round game. A grand prize opening 14 is opened, and a second grand prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game in 10R. From 5R to 9R of this jackpot game, the opening time of the first grand prize opening 14 is extremely short, and realistically, it is a round in which winning in the first grand prize opening 14 cannot be expected. That is, although the total number of round games in this jackpot game is 10, the actual number of round games is 5.

Furthermore, in the "jackpot game Y" that is executed when the "jackpot symbol Y" is determined, a round game is played 10 times. From 1R to 4R, the first big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game, and from 5R to 9R, the first prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per round game. The grand prize opening 14 is opened, and in 10R, the second grand prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per round game. From 5R to 9R of this jackpot game, the opening time of the first grand prize opening 14 is extremely short, and realistically, it is a round in which winning in the first grand prize opening 14 cannot be expected. That is, although the total number of round games in this jackpot game is 10, the actual number of round games is 4.

Furthermore, in the "jackpot game Z" that is executed when the "jackpot symbol Z" is determined, a round game is played 10 times. From 1R to 9R, the first grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game, and in 10R, the second grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Open 15. That is, in this jackpot game, both the total number of round games and the actual number of round games are 10 times.

Therefore, "Jackpot Game Z" where the actual number of round games is 10, "Jackpot Game X" where the actual number of round games is 5, and "Jackpot Game X" where the actual number of round games is 4 It can be said that this is a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than a certain "jackpot game Y".

3-4. Game State Next, the game state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state", "high probability high base gaming state", and " It is possible to set the game state to any one of the "jackpot game state". In addition, "low probability low base gaming state" is referred to as "low probability low base state", "low probability high base gaming state" is referred to as "low probability high base state", and "high probability low base gaming state" is referred to as "high probability". The "low base state" and the "high probability high base gaming state" can be respectively abbreviated as the "high probability high base state." The gaming states include a state related to the probability of being determined to be a "big hit" in the jackpot determination, and a state related to the ease of opening the electric chew 12D. The former includes a normal probability state and a high probability state. On the other hand, the latter includes a non-time saving state and a time saving state. Furthermore, "low probability low base gaming state" is defined as a low probability non-time saving state, "low probability high base gaming state" is a low probability time saving state, "high probability low base gaming state" is a high probability non time saving state, and ""High probability high base gaming state" can also be abbreviated as "high probability time saving state".

The normal probability state is set in the "low probability low base gaming state" or the "low probability high base gaming state" and is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination is the normal probability. The high probability state is set in the "high probability low base gaming state" or the "high probability high base gaming state", and is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination is higher than the normal probability. Therefore, it can be said that the high probability state is more advantageous to the player than the normal probability state. When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a normal probability state is set. Then, by winning the jackpot, it becomes possible to switch from the normal probability state to the high probability state. For example, in a jackpot game, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, it is possible to switch to a high probability state. It is also possible to switch to a high probability state depending on the type of jackpot symbol. The high probability state can be switched from the high probability state to the normal probability state by performing jackpot determination a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot or by winning the next jackpot.

The non-time saving state is set in a "low probability low base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" or "jackpot gaming state". The time saving state is set in the "low probability high base gaming state" or the "high probability high base gaming state", and is a gaming state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state. It is. For example, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D is longer (for example, 3.00 seconds) than the opening time (for example, 0.08 seconds) of the electric chew 12D in the non-time saving state. In addition, in the time-saving state, the special pattern fluctuation pattern judgment is performed using a special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table that is set so that the special pattern fluctuation pattern with a short special pattern fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time-saving state. It is also possible to do so (see FIGS. 13 and 14). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings in the starting opening (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) are more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to easily make the normal pattern fluctuation time shorter than in the non-time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, a regular pattern fluctuation time (5 seconds) is determined which is shorter than the regular pattern fluctuation time (30 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time saving state, the number of times the regular lottery is executed per unit time is greater.

Further, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier to determine a hit in the hit determination as compared to the non-time-saving state. For example, in the time-saving state, a win is determined with a higher probability (for example, 59936/65536) than in the non-time-saving state (for example, 6600/65536). Therefore, in the time-saving state, the number of times that the game is determined to be a hit per unit time is greater.

In this way, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, making it easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 12 frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, in a time-saving state where the base is high, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls in possession. Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving state.

When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a non-time saving state is set. Then, for example, by winning a jackpot, a time saving state can be set. The time-saving state can be changed from a time-saving state to a non-time-saving state by performing jackpot determination a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot, or by winning the next jackpot.

In addition, in the time saving state, compared to the non-time saving state, winnings are more likely to be won, the normal figure fluctuation time is more likely to be shortened, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is more likely to be longer. Three points are set to be advantageous to the player regarding the game related to the common map. However, only some of these points may be set advantageously for this player.

The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 after it is powered on for the first time is a "low probability low base gaming state" in which a normal probability state and a non-time saving state are set. This gaming state is also referred to as a "normal gaming state." In addition, in the "jackpot game state", a hit determination is performed but a jackpot determination is not performed, so a non-time saving state is set with the start of the jackpot game. Furthermore, regarding the gaming states, it is possible to use all or only some of the gaming states described above.

Next, returning to FIG. 16, the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described. In the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game control after the jackpot game state in which any of the above-mentioned jackpot games "Jackpot Game X", "Jackpot Game Y", and "Jackpot Game Z" is executed. Even if there is, set the time saving state. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a high probability state after a jackpot game state in which either jackpot game X or jackpot game Z is executed, while setting a high probability state after a jackpot game state in which jackpot game Y is executed. A high probability state is not set after a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed (a normal probability state is set). Therefore, after a jackpot game state in which either jackpot game X or jackpot game Z is executed, a "high probability high base game state" is set in which a high probability state and a time saving state are set. After the jackpot game state in which the jackpot game of "jackpot game Y" is executed, there is a "low probability high base game state" in which a normal probability state and a time saving state are set. When the high probability state and time saving state are set, the number of probability changes is set to 100 times and the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. Here, the variable probability number is the upper limit number of times (specified number of times) of variable display of special symbols in a high probability state. Moreover, the number of times of time saving is the upper limit number of times (specified number of times) of variable display of the special figure in the time saving state. That is, the high probability high base gaming state can continue up to 100 times of variable display of special symbols in the high probability high base gaming state. Further, when the low probability state and the time saving state are set, only the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. That is, in the low probability high base gaming state, the number of variable displays of special symbols in the low probability high base gaming state can continue up to 100 times. In other words, the "jackpot game , a jackpot gaming state in which "jackpot game

4. Main performances performed by the gaming machine Next, the main performances performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 18 to 24.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be explained. The production mode is a division of production (or a superordinate attribute). The pachinko game machine PY1 can set a customer waiting performance mode, a normal performance mode, a variable probability performance mode, a time-saving performance mode, and a jackpot performance mode as performance modes.

In the customer waiting production mode, special symbol fluctuation production is performed in "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" and "high probability high base gaming state". This is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variation production and indicates that it is in a standby state where no special symbol variation production is performed. The customer waiting performance is performed when the customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (A-1), a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed on the display screen 50a. Furthermore, when the normal button 40 is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. is displayed. Settings related to the effects include volume settings for the sound output from the speaker 52, brightness settings for the display screen 50a ("light amount settings"), and frequency settings for the effects to be performed ("effect settings").

The normal performance mode can be set when a special symbol variation performance is being performed in the "low probability low base game state" or the "high probability low base game state", and is a performance mode that indicates a non-time saving state. be. The normal presentation mode includes, for example, a first normal presentation mode in which a background image representing a daytime mountain scene (daytime normal background image G102) is displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 18 (B-1). 18(B-2), a second normal effect mode in which a background image representing an evening mountain scene (evening normal background image G103) is displayed on the display screen 50a, and FIG. 18(B-2). As shown in -3), there is a third normal performance mode in which a background image representing a mountain scenery at night (normal nighttime background image G104) is displayed on the display screen 50a. It can be switched on the condition that the special figure variation effect is performed once or multiple times. Further, each of the first to third normal performance modes includes a normal first stage performance mode before the reach is established in the special symbol variation performance, and a normal second stage performance mode after the reach is established. In the normal first stage production mode, any one of the daytime normal background image G102, the evening normal background image G103, and the nighttime normal background image G104 is displayed on the display screen 50a, but in the normal second stage production mode, depending on the type of reach A dedicated background image will be displayed. Further, a special effect mode may be provided that is set only in the "high probability low base game state".

The probability variable production mode is a production mode that can be set when a special symbol variation production is performed in the "high probability high base game state", and is a production mode that indicates a high probability state and a time saving state. In the probability variation effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B-4), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G105) is displayed on the display screen 50a. Further, the probability variable performance mode includes a probability variable first stage performance mode before the reach is established in the special symbol fluctuation performance, and a probability variable second stage performance mode after the reach is established. In the probability variable first-stage production mode, the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display screen 50a, but in the probability variation second-stage production mode, a dedicated background image according to the type of reach is displayed.

The time-saving performance mode is a performance mode that can be set when the special symbol variation performance is being performed in the "low probability high base game state", and is a performance mode that indicates the normal probability state and the time-saving state. In the time-saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B-5), a background image representing the sky (time-saving background image G106) is displayed on the display screen 50a. Furthermore, the time-saving performance mode includes a time-saving first stage performance mode before the reach is established in the special symbol variation performance, and a time-saving second stage performance mode after the reach is established. In the time-saving first performance mode, the time-saving background image G106 is displayed on the display screen 50a, but in the time-saving second stage performance mode, a dedicated background image according to the type of reach is displayed.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot production mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. A jackpot opening performance in which the winning image G108 is displayed is performed. During a round in a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18 (C-2), a round image G109 indicating the number of rounds and a prize ball number image G110 indicating the number of prize balls paid out are displayed on the display screen 50a. A round performance will be held. During the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18 (C-3), on the display screen 50a, an ending image G111 and a total prize ball number image indicating the total number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state are displayed. A jackpot ending effect in which G112 is displayed is performed.

Note that the types of production modes can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2. Special Figure Variation Effect Next, the special figure variation effect (also simply referred to as "variation effect") will be explained. When the variable display of the special pattern starts, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 displays the special pattern variation pattern related to the variable display of the special pattern and the special pattern lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type determination result, reach determination result, and A special figure variation effect is executed based on the special figure variation pattern determination result). In the special symbol variation production, a variation display of production symbols is performed on the display screen 50a in a manner superimposed on a predetermined background image. The production design is composed of, for example, number symbols from 1 to 9, and in the variable display of the production design, the production design changes with the start of the variable display of the special pattern, and the production pattern changes with the end of the variable display of the special pattern. stops. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variable display of the performance symbols are performed, the fluctuations are stopped and the static display of the performance symbols is performed. Then, the result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of the performance symbols.

In addition, in the special figure variation production, in addition to the variable display of production symbols, there are various displays such as the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the panel lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the normal button 40, the special button 41, etc. It is possible to perform other performances using similar performance equipment. In this case, even after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to continue performing other performances.

4-2-1. Effect pattern display area On the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, as shown in FIG. It is possible to provide a symbol area 50b1, a middle performance symbol area 50b2, and a right performance symbol area 50b3. The left performance symbol area 50b1 is an area where the left performance symbol EZ1 is displayed when the performance symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol variation performance. Similarly, the middle performance symbol area 50b2 and the right performance symbol region 50b3 are areas for displaying the middle performance symbol EZ2 and the right performance symbol EZ3. Note that the left performance symbol EZ1, the middle performance symbol EZ2, and the right performance symbol EZ3 correspond to "a plurality of performance symbols".

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(A), it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in one section of the left end (upper left corner) of the upper end of the display screen 50a. The small symbol area 50c is an area where the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variably displayed when the special symbol is variably displayed. The small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are composed of numerical symbols 1 to 9, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 19(A), the left presentation pattern area 50b1, the middle presentation pattern area 50b2, the right presentation pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by two-dot chain lines, but this is the left presentation pattern area 50b1. , the middle effect pattern area 50b2, the right effect pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are described to represent the range, and are not actually displayed.

4-2-2. Normal variation Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can first perform normal variation in the special figure variation performance. The normal variation functions as an effect that suggests that the variable display of the special figure has started.

When the variable display of the special symbols starts, for example, as shown in FIG. , EZ2, EZ3" (also referred to as "production pattern EZ") are displayed in a stopped state, and the left small pattern KZ1, medium and small pattern KZ2, and right small pattern KZ3 are also stopped and displayed, and the special pattern is variablely displayed. As shown in FIG. 19(B), the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 starts, and the small symbols Variable display of KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is started. Note that "↓" in FIG. 19 indicates that the symbol is being displayed in a changing manner. Then, when the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of this special symbol is, for example, "normal loss variation", the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 are different, as shown in FIG. 19 (C-1). After temporarily stopping in the stop mode, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called flop) that suggests a loss, as shown in FIG. 19(D). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a loss. There are multiple types of stopping patterns that indicate a loss, such as "1, 1, 2" and "2, 4, 6", in which the left and right symbols are not the same. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a special symbol variation pattern with a reach, such as "N loss variation", as shown in FIG. 19 (C-2), the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 temporarily stop in the same stopping manner (so-called reach eye), and reach is established. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continued, and a reach effect is performed according to the special symbol variation pattern. Note that the stopping order and stopping manner of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-3. N-Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing N-Reach when a reach is established in the normal variation. N reach is a performance that suggests that the result of the jackpot determination may be a "jackpot", and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot.

In N reach, as shown in FIG. 20(A), the state in which reach is established is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and as shown in FIG. 20(B), the fluctuation speed of the medium effect symbol EZ2 gradually changes. It slows down. If the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "N loss variation", as shown in FIG. The symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a miss in the reach. There are a plurality of types of stopping patterns that suggest a miss in the reach, such as "7, 6, 7" and "5, 3, 5", in which the left and right symbols are the same and the inner symbol is different from the left and right symbols. On the other hand, if the special pattern fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is, for example, "N jackpot fluctuation", the game will stop in a stopping manner (so-called double) that suggests a jackpot, as shown in Figure 20 (C-2). indicate. There are multiple types of stopping patterns that suggest a jackpot, such as "7.7.7" and "2.2.2", in which the symbols in the left and right middles are the same. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a jackpot. In addition, the performance content of N reach is not limited to the gradual deceleration of the medium performance symbol EZ2, but can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2-4. SP Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform SP Reach after N Reach. The SP reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is a "big win" is higher than the N reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot.

In SP reach, after N reach, for example, as shown in FIG. An image (SP reach start title image) G1 representing that reach has started is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 21(B), an SP reach-only performance (for example, a battle performance) is performed. Then, when the final phase of the SP reach-only production is reached, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "SP jackpot variation", the display screen will be displayed as shown in FIG. 21 (C-1). At 50a, a production that suggests a jackpot (for example, a display in which the main character is happy after winning the battle) is performed, and the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 stop in a stop mode that suggests a jackpot (so-called double eye). indicate. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a jackpot. On the other hand, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is, for example, "SP loss variation", as shown in Figure 19 (C-2), there will be an effect that suggests a loss (for example, an enemy character enters the battle). At the same time, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode that suggests a loss of reach. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a loss. Note that the contents of the SP reach performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

Here, the possibility that the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 for each reach will be stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot (jackpot expectation level, winning expectation level) will be explained in detail. The jackpot expectation level for each reach is determined by the execution probability based on the jackpot determination result. For example, if the execution probability of N Reach is 10% when the jackpot determination result is "Lose" and 100% when the jackpot determination result is "Jackpot", the execution probability of SP Reach is If the result of the jackpot judgment is "Lose", it is set to 4%, and if the result of the jackpot judgment is "Jackpot", it is set to 100%, then the jackpot expectation of SP reach is higher than the jackpot expectation of N reach. It is possible to set it higher. In addition, SP Reach A and SP Reach B are made executable as SP Reach, and the execution probability of SP Reach A is set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose", and if the result of the Jackpot determination is "Lose", the execution probability of SP Reach A is set to 2%. If the probability of executing SP Reach B is set to 20% in the case of , the execution probability of SP Reach B will be set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose", and 30% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose". For example, it is possible to set the jackpot expectation level of SP Reach B higher than the jackpot expectation level of SP Reach A. In this way, by appropriately setting the execution probability according to the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to set the jackpot expectation level.

4-3. Pending Icon Display Area The display screen 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with a pending icon display area 50d consisting of four display areas, as shown in FIG. 22(A). The reservation icon display area 50d is composed of a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3, and a fourth display area 50d4. It is possible to display the hold icon HA in the display areas 50d1, 50d2, 50d3, and 50d4. For example, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is "1", the reserved icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1, and when the number of reserved special figures 1 is "2", the reserved icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and A hold icon HA is displayed in the second display area 50d2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22(A), an icon display area 50e consisting of one display area can be provided near the pending icon display area 50d. The icon display area 50e can display the icon TA, which is the same as or different from the pending icon HA, in response to the start of the special figure variation effect.

Note that the number of display areas constituting the pending icon display area 50d can be changed as appropriate. Further, the reservation icon display area 50d can be used as a display area that displays both the number of special drawings 1 and the number of reserved special drawings 2, or can be used as a display area that displays only one of them.

4-3-1. Hold Performance Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform hold performance in response to a game ball entering the first starting slot 11 or the second starting slot 12. The reservation performance can notify the player of the number of special symbols 1 or 2 reserved.

In the hold effect, when the game ball enters the first starting slot 11 when the special figure 1 hold count is "0", the special figure fluctuation effect is started, and for example, as shown in FIG. 22(B), the icon The icon TA is displayed in the display area 50e. Then, when two more game balls enter the first starting slot 11 during the special figure variation performance, as shown in FIG. 20(C), the first display area 50d1 and the second display area of the reserved icon display area 50d A hold icon HA is displayed at 50d2, and the player is informed that the special figure 1 hold count is "2". After that, when the special figure variation effect is finished and a new special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 20(D), the hold icon displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the hold icon display area 50d HA moves to the icon display area 50e and is displayed as the icon TA, and the hold icon HA that was displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d moves to the first display area 50d1 and is displayed. Then, the player is informed that the number of special drawings 1 pending is "1".

4-4. Preview Performance The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a preview performance at any timing during the special figure variation performance. The preview performance is a performance using the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the buttons 40, 41, etc., and includes the results of jackpot determination and special pattern fluctuation pattern determination. It is possible to suggest the results of

4-4-1. Movable Body Performance The pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of performing a movable body performance using the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 as a preview performance. The movable body performance is a performance that operates the movable devices 55, 56, and 58, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win.

In the movable object performance, for example, when N reach progresses to SP reach, as shown in FIG. It is suggested that the lower movable body 56k moves so as to overlap with the display screen 50a as seen from the player, leading to SP reach. At this time, an effect image is displayed on the display screen 50a in a space that does not overlap with the above-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable body 56k. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23(B), the above-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable body 56k return to the normal standby state (initial position) and develop into SP reach. Note that the movable body performance is not limited to suggesting the development of SP reach, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation contents of the movable device in the movable body performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4-2. Operation performance The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform an operation performance using the normal button 40 and special button 41 as a preview performance. The operation performance is a performance in which the player operates the normal button 40 or the special button 41, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win.

In the operation performance, for example, in SP reach, a period (button operation validity period) occurs during which the press operation of the special button 41 is valid, and with the occurrence of this button operation validity period, as shown in FIG. 24 (A) , a performance that prompts the user to operate the special button 41 (button operation promotion performance) is performed. In the button operation promotion effect, a button operation promotion image G3 is displayed on the display screen 50a. The button operation promotion image G3 includes an image imitating the special button 41 (special button image G31), an image (press operation image G32) representing the operation mode of the special button 41 (that is, a press operation), and a button operation valid period. An image representing the remaining time (operation valid period remaining time image G33) is included. Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G33 is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes as time passes so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. Thereafter, in response to the special button 41 being pressed during the button operation valid period, or after the button operation valid period has elapsed without any special button 41 being operated during the button operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 24(B). As shown in , the on-board movable device 55 is activated, and as seen from the player, the on-board movable body 55k moves so as to overlap the display screen 50a, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot. Note that the operation performance is not limited to the operation of the on-board movable device 55, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4-3. Pre-read performance The pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing a pre-read performance for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold for which the special figure lottery has not been performed, as a preview effect. The pre-reading performance functions as a performance for suggesting in advance the lottery result of the special symbol lottery for the special symbol 1 reservation or the special symbol 2 reservation.

In the look-ahead effect, for example, if the result of the look-ahead determination for special drawing 1 hold is "jackpot", the hold icon HA, which is normally displayed as ``〇'', in the hold icon display area 50d, as shown in FIG. 22(C). may be displayed as "☆". Further, when the result of the pre-reading determination is "lost", the hold icon HA may be displayed as "☆" as a so-called fake effect. In addition, the pre-reading performance can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Further, the change is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, and changes or additions can be made as appropriate. For example, it is also possible to change the stopping manner of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the special symbol variation performance.

5. Display on 7-segment display Next, the display on the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 9) will be described. On the 7-segment display 300, the normal base, which is the ratio between the total number of normal prize balls won by the player in the normal gaming state and the normal number of balls fired by the player in the normal gaming state, is displayed as a percentage (%) value. Is displayed. Note that the 7-segment display 300 displays bases other than the normal base (time-saving base, which is the ratio of the total number of time-saving prize balls acquired by the player in the time-saving state to the number of time-saving shot balls fired by the player in the time-saving state, and jackpot game). The jackpot base, which is the ratio between the total number of jackpot balls won by the player in the jackpot game state and the number of jackpot balls fired by the player in the jackpot game state, is never displayed.

Here, the game control microcomputer 101 is configured to always count the number of normally fired balls, the total number of normally prized balls, and the total number of fired balls. The total number of balls fired is the number of balls fired by the player in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.). The total number of fired balls is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the detection of the discharge port sensor. The number of normally fired balls is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the detection of the discharge port sensor only in the normal game state. The total number of normal prize balls is calculated by counting the number of prize balls paid out by the game control microcomputer 101 in the normal gaming state.

The information on the number of normally fired balls counted for display on the 7-segment display 300, the information on the total number of normally awarded balls, and the information on the total number of fired balls are stored in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104 (FIG. (see) is stored in a specific storage area (not shown). Therefore, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of normally fired balls, the information on the total number of normally awarded balls, and the information on the total number of fired balls are maintained (not deleted). In this way, even if the RAM clear is executed, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the normal base using the normal number of balls fired at the time of power cutoff and the normal total prize ball number at the time of power cutoff. The game control microcomputer 101 then displays the normal base value on the 7-segment display 300 regardless of the gaming state (in the normal gaming state, jackpot gaming state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.). Displayed in the right two digits (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340 (see FIG. 9)).

Here, the normal base is calculated by dividing the total number of fired balls into 60,000 rounds. In other words, the normal base calculated from when the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory until the total number of fired balls reaches 60,000 becomes the first normal base. Thereafter, when the total number of balls fired exceeds 60,001 shots, the value that was the first normal base is stored as the previous normal base. The normal base calculated when the total number of fired balls increases from 60,001 to 120,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, if the total number of balls fired exceeds 120,001 shots, the value that was the normal base of the previous round will be stored as the normal base of the second round, and the value that was the current normal base will be stored as the normal base of the previous round. Ru. The normal base calculated until the total number of fired balls increases from 120,001 to 180,000 becomes the current normal base.

After that, if the total number of balls fired exceeds 180,001 shots, the value that was the normal base 2 times ago will be stored as the normal base 3 times ago, and the value that was the normal base 1 time ago will be stored as the normal base 2 times ago. The value that was the current normal base is stored as the previous normal base. The normal base calculated until the total number of fired balls increases from 180,001 to 240,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of balls fired exceeds 240,001 shots, the value that was the normal base 3 times ago will be deleted, the value that was the normal base 2 times ago will be stored as the normal base 3 times ago, and the value that was the normal base 2 times ago will be stored as the normal base 3 times ago. The value that was the normal base is stored as the normal base two times before, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the normal base one time before. The normal base calculated until the total number of fired balls increases from 240,001 to 300,000 becomes the current normal base. Thereafter, the normal base is similarly calculated every 60,000 total shots, and the normal base values up to three times before are stored.

In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the current normal base, the previous normal base, the second previous normal base, and the third previous normal base at the maximum in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104. You can leave it there. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101 displays the current normal base ⇒ 1 previous normal base ⇒ 2nd previous normal base, ⇒ 3rd previous normal base ⇒ current normal base 5 on the 7-segment display 300. The display is changed every second.

Specifically, in the 7-segment display 300, when "bL" is displayed in the left two digits (first display area 310 and second display area 320 (see FIG. 9)), the right two digits (third display area 330 and a fourth display area 340), the current normal base is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "bL" in the left two digits can understand that the value shown in the right two digits (normal base) is the current normal base.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the current normal base display started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b1" in the left two digits, and displays the previous normal base in the right two digits. be done. Therefore, a person who sees "b1" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the previous normal base.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the previous normal base started, the 7-segment display 300 will display "b2" in the left two digits, and the two previous normal base will be displayed in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b2" in the two digits on the left can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the two digits on the right is the normal base two times ago.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the previous two normal bases started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b3" in the left two digits, and the three previous normal bases in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b3" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the normal base three times ago.

Then, when 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the normal base display three times before, the 7-segment display 300 displays "bL" in the left two digits and the current state in the right two digits, as described above. The normal base of is displayed and the same is repeated thereafter.

Furthermore, in the 7-segment display 300, if the total number of balls fired is 300 balls or less after the power is turned on for the first time after shipping from the factory, "--" is displayed in the two digits on the right. That is, when the total number of fired balls is 300 balls or less, the normal base value is not displayed, and after the total number of fired balls exceeds 300 balls, the normal base value is displayed. In this way, if the total number of balls fired is 300 balls or less, the value of the denominator of the normal base (number of normally fired balls) is too small, which avoids displaying the unreliable value of the normal base. There is. In addition, even if the total number of fired balls is 300 or less, the left two digits of the 7-segment display 300 will repeat the display of "bL" ⇒ "b1" ⇒ "b2" ⇒ "b3" every 5 seconds. .

In addition, on the 7-segment display 300, if the number of balls normally fired after the power is turned on for the first time after leaving the factory is 6000 balls or less, the two digits on the left will indicate "bL", "b1", "b2", "b3". ' will start blinking. Thereafter, when the number of normally fired balls exceeds 6000 balls after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "bL", "b1", "b2", and "b3" indicated by the two digits on the left become lit. In this way, if the left two digits are shown blinking to the person checking the normal base on the 7-segment display 300, the normal base value shown in the right two digits has not yet converged sufficiently. It is possible to make the user understand that the value is not present. In other words, if you show the lighting mode in the two digits on the left to someone who is checking the normal base, they will understand that the normal base value shown in the two digits on the right is a value that has converged to some extent. It is possible to do so.

Further, in the 7-segment display 300, when the setting mode is entered after the power is turned on, the setting value (“1”) is displayed in the fourth display area 340. Thereafter, when the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting mode ends and the setting value (“1”) is no longer displayed in the fourth display area 340. In this way, the setting value is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 only while the setting mode is set.

Further, in the 7-segment display 300, an initial display is performed after the power is turned on until the normal base display starts. As described above, when transitioning to the setting mode after the power is turned on, the initial display is executed after the setting mode ends. In the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, all the lighting parts LB1 to LB32 (see FIG. 9) included in the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 are lit. That is, "8.8.8.8." is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. In this way, the initial display is performed on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after the power is turned on, thereby indicating that the 7-segment display 300 operates normally.

6. Over-winning ball prevention function Next, the over-winning ball prevention function will be explained. In this pachinko game machine PY1, the game control microcomputer 101 is capable of operating an excessive prize ball prevention function so as not to award excessive prize balls to the player. Specifically, as will be described later, the excessive prize ball prevention function is basically a function that makes it impossible to play the game on the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 (reference number) or more. Here, the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls. The total number of prize balls is the number of prize balls that the player obtains (is paid out to the player) in all gaming states (normal playing state, jackpot playing state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.) It is. Note that the total number of prize balls means the total number of prize balls that the game control microcomputer 101 plans to pay out to the player, but does not mean the total number of prize balls that are actually paid out to the player. It's okay. As mentioned above, the total number of balls fired is the number of balls fired by the player in all game states.

The game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on, and information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the non-erasable storage section 107 of the game RAM 104. It is stored in the total prize pitch number storage unit 107a (see FIG. 6). Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of fired balls at any time after the power is turned on, and information on the counted total number of fired balls is stored in the non-erasable storage section 107 of the gaming RAM 104. The total number of balls fired is stored in the storage unit 107b (see FIG. 6). The game control microcomputer 101 calculates the number of difference balls by subtracting the total number of balls fired from the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on. The difference number of balls is stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c (see FIG. 6) provided in the non-erasable storage section 107 of the RAM 104.

Therefore, even if RAM clear is executed, the game control microcomputer 101 does not erase the information on the total number of prize balls, the information on the total number of fired balls, and the information on the difference number of balls stored in the non-erasable storage section 107. . In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the difference in the number of balls across dates using the total number of prize balls at the time of power cutoff and the total number of fired balls at the time of power cutoff. Note that the game control microcomputer 101 is configured to treat the difference number of balls as a negative value when the value of the total number of balls fired is larger than the value of the total number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process related to the game (processing of steps S102 to S108 described later, see FIG. 35), but also fires the game ball. The firing control process (the process of step 109 described later, see FIG. 35) for the purpose of this is also stopped. Therefore, even if the player rotates the handle 72k, the game ball is not shot, and the player can immediately notice that the game cannot be played. In addition, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process and stops receiving signals according to the detection contents from the various sensors MS, and the display devices 8 and 7 segments The display control of the display 300 is no longer executed, the various actuators MA are no longer operated, and the outer end signal is no longer output to the external terminal board 160 via the dispensing control board 170.

After the over-winning ball prevention function is activated, the situation in which the game cannot be executed continues until the power is cut off. In this embodiment, the excessive prize ball prevention function is canceled on the condition that RAM clearing is executed. That is, after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the employee of the gaming hall shuts off the power by turning off the power switch 193. Then, when turning on the power by turning on the power switch 193, the employee of the gaming hall depresses the RAM clear switch 191. Thereby, by executing RAM clear, the game control microcomputer 101 can execute the game control process and firing control process regarding the game. In this way, in this embodiment, after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game cannot be restarted simply by turning the power off and on (re-on), but the game can be restarted only by clearing the RAM. can.

Next, the timing at which the excessive prize ball prevention function operates will be explained based on FIG. 25. The over-winning ball prevention function basically operates on the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more (predetermined condition). That is, in this embodiment, the over-prize ball prevention function basically operates at the timing when the difference number of balls reaches 80,000. However, in this embodiment, even if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more, if a jackpot game is in progress, the over-prize ball prevention function is set on the condition that the jackpot game is finished (predetermined condition). may operate. That is, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate at the timing when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 during execution of a jackpot game, and the over-prize ball prevention function operates at the timing when the execution of the jackpot game ends.

First, with reference to FIG. 25(A), a case will be described in which the over-prize ball prevention function is activated at the timing when the difference number of balls reaches 80,000. For example, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 25(A)(a). Of course, at this time, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Next, as shown in FIGS. 25(A) and 25(b), it is assumed that the number of differential balls reaches 80,000 when the player is in the middle of the high-accuracy, high-base state. At this time, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. In this way, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 25(A) and 25(c), the game is stopped in the middle of the high probability high base state, and it is possible to end the game in the middle of the high probability high base state. It is.

On the other hand, with reference to FIG. 25(B), a case will be described in which the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 and the over-prize ball prevention function is activated after the end of the jackpot game. For example, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 25(B)(a). Of course, at this time, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Next, as shown in FIG. 25(B)(b), it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 when the jackpot game state is in the middle. At this time, the excessive prize ball prevention function does not operate. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 25(B) and 25(c), when the jackpot game state ends, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. In this way, in this embodiment, the game does not stop during the jackpot gaming state, and it is possible for the player to end the game at a convenient timing when the jackpot gaming state ends.

In this embodiment, the information on the difference number of balls is stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107, and the difference number of balls is not reset (cleared) by turning the power off and on. As described above, even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the difference in the number of balls is not reset. This is based on the following reasons.

In the pachinko game machine PY1, even during business hours, there are situations where the power is turned off and turned on (re-on) or the RAM is cleared due to bugs, malfunctions, severe fraud, etc. In such a situation, if the difference in the number of balls is reset by turning on the power again or clearing the RAM, the purpose of providing the over-prize ball prevention function will be lost. In other words, if a bug, malfunction, or serious fraud occurs, there is a risk that the player who restarts the game afterward will be given an unfair advantage by making it difficult for the over-prize ball prevention function to operate. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the above-mentioned unfair advantage from being given to the player, the number of differential balls is not reset by turning the power back on or executing RAM clearing.

Next, the conditions under which the difference number of balls is reset will be explained based on FIG. 26. In this embodiment, there are two reset conditions for resetting the difference number of balls. The first reset condition is that the special reset switch 181 is pressed down, as shown in FIG. 26(A). In other words, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives a signal based on the pressing operation of the special reset switch 181, it clears the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107. do. Note that when the information on the number of differential balls stored in the differential ball number storage section 107c is reset (cleared), the information on the total number of award balls and the total number of balls stored in the total number of award balls storage section 107a are also reset (cleared). The information on the total number of fired balls stored in the fired ball number storage unit 107b is also reset, but hereinafter it will simply be referred to as "the difference number of balls is reset (cleared)". Although FIG. 26A shows a case where the number of differential balls is reset when the special reset switch 181 is pressed while waiting for a customer, it does not matter in which gaming state (for example, normal gaming state). However, when the special reset switch 181 is pressed, the difference number of balls is reset.

The second reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time), as shown in FIG. 26(A). In other words, if the game is not played for one hour after entering the customer waiting state, the game control microcomputer 101 will delete the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107. clear. Note that the customer waiting state is a gaming state in which no game is executed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

The above two reset conditions are provided for the following reasons. For example, as shown in FIGS. 26(A) and 26(B), it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in a jackpot game state due to a game played by a certain player. Thereafter, when a certain player transitions from the jackpot gaming state to the high-probability-high-base state and then to the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the game has ended. In this case, for the player who starts the next game, if the number of difference balls increases by a small amount (within 10,000), the excessive prize ball prevention function may be activated, which is extremely disadvantageous.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26(A), the number of differential balls is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181. Thereby, an employee of the gaming parlor can reset the number of difference balls by pressing the special reset switch 181 at any timing after a certain player finishes playing the game. Further, as shown in FIG. 26(B), if the customer waiting state continues for one hour, it is determined that the player has finished the game, and the difference in the number of balls is automatically reset. Thereby, the difference in the number of balls can be reset without imposing any operational burden on the employees of the game parlor. In this way, by providing the above two reset conditions, it is possible to prevent the next player who starts the game from having the excessive prize ball prevention function activated immediately after starting the game, which would put him at a huge disadvantage. It is possible.

Next, the production mode when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated will be explained based on FIG. 27(A). When the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, as shown in FIG. 27(A), a red background image RE is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the message "Error X, excessive prize ball error, please clear RAM" is displayed. An error cancellation method image ERX showing the error is displayed. Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off. In this way, the presentation mode shown in FIG. 27(A) makes it possible for the player to immediately recognize the situation in which the game cannot be played. Note that the presentation mode shown in FIG. 27(A) continues until the power is cut off. The presentation mode shown in FIG. 27(A) is canceled when RAM clear is executed, but it continues as it is only by turning the power back on.

Here, a case will be described in which an illegal magnetism is detected in this pachinko gaming machine PY1. When the magnetic sensor detects illegal magnetism, the magnetic sensor outputs a signal according to the magnetic detection to the main control board 100. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process and the firing control process related to the game, similarly to when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. In this way, the situation in which the game cannot be executed due to magnetic detection continues until the power is cut off. However, in this case, unlike the case where the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 executes game control processing and firing control processing regarding the game by turning the power off and on (returning the power on). can do.

Next, the presentation mode when illegal magnetism is detected will be explained based on FIG. 27(B). When an illegal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, a red background image RE is displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. An error release method image ER1 indicating "Please do so" is displayed. Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off. In this way, if we compare the performance mode when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated (see Figure 27 (A)) and the performance mode when illegal magnetism is detected (see Figure 27 (B)), we can see how to cancel it. Everything other than the image is the same. Therefore, it is necessary to make employees or players at the gaming parlor aware that they are in a situation where they cannot play the game both when illegal magnetism is detected and when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. It is possible to make it easier.

Next, the performance mode when the difference number of balls reaches 70,000 will be explained based on FIG. 28(A). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 25(A)(a) or FIG. 25(B)(a). First, as shown in FIG. 28(A), a round image G109 and a prize ball number image G110 are displayed on the display screen 50a. Then, when the difference number of balls reaches 70,000, a purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a, and at the bottom of the display screen 50a, an over-prize ball error indicating "over-prize ball abnormality with 10,000 shots left" is displayed. A ball preview image KY is displayed. By displaying the purple border image EFa and the over-prized ball preview image KY, it is possible for the player to grasp the situation where the over-prized ball prevention function is about to be activated. The display of the purple border image EFa continues even after the jackpot game state ends, but the display of the super prize ball preview image KY ends when the jackpot game state ends. Note that the over-prize ball preview image KY may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot game state ends.

Next, the performance mode when the difference number of balls reaches 80,000 will be explained based on FIG. 28(B). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 25(B)(b). As shown in FIG. 28(B), a round image G109 and a prize ball number image G110 are displayed on the display screen 50a. Then, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000, a red border image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a, and a game stop notice image indicating that "the game is stopped when the jackpot game ends" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. KH is displayed. By displaying the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH, it is possible for the player to know that the game stop is approaching and when the game will be stopped. The display of the red edge image EFb and the display of the game stop notice image KH are configured to end when the jackpot game state ends.

Here, after the difference number of balls reaches 70,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 25(A)(a) or FIG. 25(B)(a), the production mode in the high accuracy high base state is as shown in FIG. 29. That's right. That is, as shown in FIG. 29, on the display screen 50a, the probability variation background image G105 is displayed, and the effect pattern EZ is displayed in a variable manner. A purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a. This purple edge image EFa allows the player to play the game while being aware that the difference in the number of balls has reached 70,000.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(A), a presentation mode will be described when the number of difference balls is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181. In this case, a situation arises in which an employee of the gaming hall opens the front door 23 to the outer frame 22 and presses the special reset switch 181. Therefore, the front door open sensor detects the opening of the front door 23, and the error release method image ER2 showing "Error 2 Please close the front door" is displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. is displayed. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. This makes it possible for employees at the gaming parlor to know that the difference in the number of balls has been reset.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(B), a presentation mode will be described when the customer waiting state continues for one hour. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 30(B). At this time, as shown in FIG. 30(B), a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference number of balls has been reset" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. This makes it possible for employees at the gaming parlor to know that the difference in the number of balls has been reset.

7. About the characteristic effects of this mode In this mode, when the difference in the number of balls exceeds 80,000, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, making it possible to prevent excessive prize balls from being given to the player. ing. However, even if there is a special figure hold when the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the game will be controlled to be unplayable, so the special figure hold will be worthless and may be disadvantageous to the player. .

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, the result of the look-ahead determination is "jackpot", and the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls is 80,000 or more. If it is determined that this is the case, an over-prize ball advance suggestion performance (pre-suggestion performance) is executed which indicates in advance the possibility that the over-prize ball prevention function is activated and the game is uncontrollably controlled. Thereafter, the special figure related random number caused by the execution of the over-prize ball advance suggestion performance is cleared from the special figure reservation storage unit 105, and the special figure fluctuation is based on the result of the determination as to whether or not it will be a jackpot in the special figure determination process. In the performance, an over-prize ball preview performance (control suggestion performance) that suggests that the over-prize ball prevention function will be activated after the end of the scheduled jackpot game is executed. As a result, if the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated, there is a high possibility that the game will be controlled to be unexecutable (the result of the look-ahead judgment is a "jackpot", and it is possible to win in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed). If it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls to the current number of difference balls is 80,000 or more), the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated in advance by the over-prize ball advance suggestion presentation or the over-prize ball preview presentation. This makes it possible to make them understand that there is a possibility that Therefore, if there is a high possibility that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function will be activated, the number of reserved special drawings will be increased needlessly by entering the game ball into the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. This makes it possible to reduce disadvantages for the player such as the player being left behind.

The over-prized ball advance suggestion performance and the over-prized ball preview performance will be explained using FIG. 31. In addition, in FIG. 31, it is assumed that the current number of difference balls is 79250, for example. Moreover, in FIG. 31, special figure 1 related random numbers are stored in the first area to the second area of the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a. That is, the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "2". Furthermore, in FIG. 31, the result of the look-ahead determination based on the special figure 1 related random number stored in the second area of the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is "jackpot", and the jackpot symbol type is "jackpot symbol X". It is assumed that In addition, in FIG. 31, the display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 on the display screen 50a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 31(A), the first display area 50d1, second display area 50d2, third display area 50d3, and fourth display area 50d4 of the reserved icon display area 50d and the icon display area 50e are displayed. However, some display areas are omitted in FIGS. 31(B) to 31(F).

As shown in FIG. 31(A), when the normal production mode is set, the daytime normal background image G102 is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the purple border image EFa is displayed on the edge of the display screen 50a. has been done. As shown in FIG. 31(A), since the special symbol variation effect is being executed, the effect patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 50a.

As shown in FIG. 31(A), the icon TA is displayed in the icon display area 50e. Further, as shown in FIG. 31(A), a hold icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d. Since the reservation icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and the second display area 50d2, the special figure 1 reservation number is "2".

Thereafter, when the execution of the special figure variation effect is completed, the process proceeds to the example effect shown in FIG. 31(B). As shown in FIG. 31(B), the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a. It should be noted that the middle effect pattern EZ2 and right effect pattern EZ3, which are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a, are effect patterns in a normal mode consisting only of a part indicating a number (number part). When the over-prize ball advance suggestion performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the left performance pattern EZ1 that is definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a becomes the performance pattern EZT in the special pattern mode. In addition, the special pattern mode (special pattern mode) of the production pattern EZ in the super prize ball advance suggestion production of this form is a pattern mode in which a part indicating a number (number part) and a part indicating an angel character are combined. It has become. On the display screen 50a, the symbol mode of the left production symbol EZ1 is a special symbol mode, so that the current difference number of balls is 70,000 or more, and the result of the look-ahead judgment is "jackpot", and the scheduled execution is If the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in a jackpot game to the current number of difference balls is 80,000 or more, the excessive prize ball prevention function may be activated and the game may be controlled in an impossible manner. It becomes possible to have the person understand the information.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31(B), when the execution of the special figure variation effect is completed, the icon TA displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a disappears.

Note that when we say fixed stop display (determined stop display) or final stop display (final stop display), we mean a state in which the production symbols are completely stopped. On the other hand, with a temporary stop display, the fluctuation speed of the production design is "0", but the production design changes such as shaking or repeating expansion and reduction at the displayed position, and it is completely Refers to a state in which it is not stopped. When simply referred to as a "stop display", it may refer to a temporary stop display, or it may refer to a confirmed stop display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 31(C), one of the oldest stored first special symbols is used up, a special symbol 1 lottery is performed, and execution of the special symbol variation effect is started. As shown in FIG. 31(C), when the execution of the special figure variation effect is started, the white circle hold icon HA (FIG. 31(B) ) is shifted to the right by one position, and the white circle icon TA is displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a (see FIG. 31(C)). Additionally, the white star pending icon HA (see FIG. 31(B)) that was displayed in the second display area 50d2 provided on the display screen 50a is shifted by one place to the right and is now displayed in the second display area 50d2 provided on the display screen 50a. A white star pending icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 (see FIG. 31(C)). That is, the special figure 1 reservation number is "1". In addition, when execution of the special symbol variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 31(C), variable display of the effect patterns EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is started on the display screen 50a.

After that, when the execution of the special figure variation effect is completed, the process proceeds to the example effect shown in FIG. 31(D). As shown in FIG. 31(D), the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a. It should be noted that the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3, which are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a, are performance patterns in a normal mode consisting only of a part indicating a number (number part). When the over-prize ball advance suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 31(D), on the display screen 50a, since the pattern mode of the medium effect pattern EZ2 is a special pattern mode, the result of the pre-reading judgment is " Jackpot", and the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls is 80,000 or more, and the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated and the game is controlled to be impossible. This makes it possible for the player to understand that there is a possibility that he/she may Furthermore, in the production example shown in FIG. 31(B), the left production pattern EZ1 is definitely stopped and displayed in the special pattern mode, and then in the production example shown in FIG. 31(D), the middle production pattern EZ2 is definitely displayed in the special pattern mode. By displaying the ball in a stopped state, it is possible for the player to understand that the over-winning ball prevention function is gradually approaching activation.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 31(E), the special figure 1-related random number caused by the execution of the super prize ball advance suggestion effect is cleared from the special figure 1 pending storage unit 105a, and the special figure 1 related random number is cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and the special figure 1 related random number caused by the execution of the super prize ball advance suggestion performance is cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and the special figure 1 related random number is cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. The execution of the special symbol variation effect based on the result of the determination as to whether or not it will be started. As shown in FIG. 31(E), when the execution of the special symbol variation effect is started, variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is started on the display screen 50a. As shown in FIG. 31(E), when the execution of the special figure variation effect is started, the white star pending icon HA (FIG. 31(D) ) is shifted to the right by one position, and the white star icon TA is displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a (see FIG. 31(E)).

After that, when the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect ends, an over-prize ball preview effect that suggests that the over-prize ball prevention function will be activated after the end of the scheduled jackpot game is executed, and the display screen 50a The performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the special symbol mode are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the process proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 31(F). As shown in FIG. 31(F), the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the special symbol mode are definitely stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 31(F), the pattern form of the performance pattern EZ in the over-prize ball preview performance is the same pattern pattern (special pattern pattern) as the pattern pattern of the performance pattern EZ in the prize ball advance suggestion performance. If the current difference number of balls is 70,000 or more because the pattern modes of the performance patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a are all special pattern modes, the jackpot determination result It is possible to make the player understand that it is a "jackpot" and that it has been determined that the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed will be 80,000 or more when added to the current number of difference balls. It becomes. In addition, since the pattern modes of the performance patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a are all special pattern modes, the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated at the timing when the jackpot game ends. This makes it possible for the player to understand that the game is being controlled in an impossible manner.

Next, using FIG. 32, an explanation will be given of an effect image displayed on the display screen 50a when the number reaches 80,000 or more during the jackpot game state. As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches, for example, 79,700 at the timing shown in FIG. 32(A).

As shown in FIG. 32(A), on the display screen 50a, a round image G109 indicating "Round 8" and a prize ball number image G110 indicating "1200 pt" are displayed. When the difference in number of balls is 70,000 or more, a purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a, and a message "Over-prize ball abnormality with 300 shots remaining" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. The over-prized ball preview image KY shown in FIG. By displaying the purple border image EFa and the over-prized ball preview image KY, it is possible for the player to grasp the situation where the over-prized ball prevention function is about to be activated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32(B), a round image G109 indicating "Round 10" and a prize ball number image G110 indicating "1400 pt" are displayed on the display screen 50a. When the difference in number of balls is 70,000 or more, a purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a, and a message "Over-prize ball abnormality with 100 shots left" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. The over-prized ball preview image KY shown in FIG. By displaying the purple border image EFa and the over-prized ball preview image KY, it is possible for the player to grasp the situation where the over-prized ball prevention function is about to be activated.

Thereafter, when the number of difference balls reaches 80,000 during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 32(C), a red border image EFb is displayed on the edge of the display screen 50a, and At the bottom of the screen, a game stop notice image KH indicating "the game will stop when the jackpot game ends" is displayed. By displaying the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH, it is possible for the player to understand the situation in which the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated at the timing when the jackpot game ends and the game is stopped. Further, as shown in FIG. 32(C), on the display screen 50a, a round image G109 indicating "Round 10" and a prize ball number image G110 indicating "1500 pt" are displayed.

After that, during the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 32(D), on the display screen 50a, an ending image G111 and a total prize ball number image indicating the total number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state are displayed. A jackpot ending effect in which G112 is displayed is performed. As shown in FIG. 32(C), a red border image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a, and a game stop notice image KH indicating that "the game will stop when the jackpot game ends" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. is displayed. By displaying the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH, it is possible for the player to understand the situation in which the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated and the game is stopped at the timing when the jackpot game ends. When the execution of the jackpot game is completed, the process proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 33(A).

In this embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, so it is possible to prevent excessive prize balls from being given to the player. However, if the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is controlled to be unplayable, the player may feel dissatisfied because he or she will not be able to obtain more prize balls.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the display screen 50a displays the game results (for example, the total number of shots, the total Since the number of winnings, total number of balls won and balls played) are suggested, it is possible to not only give the player a sense of accomplishment until the over-winning balls prevention function is activated, but also to be able to predict the next time based on information on game results. From then on, it is also possible to determine whether or not to play a game using the pachinko game machine PY1. This makes it possible to have a positive influence on subsequent games at the pachinko game machine PY1.

Next, by activating the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function, the player is informed of the game result from 0 to 80,000 or more difference balls by the effect image displayed on the display screen 50a. This will be explained using FIG. 33. In addition, in this embodiment, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game stop notification image YT that informs that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function has been activated and the game has been stopped is displayed on the display screen 50a for a predetermined period (for example, , 2 seconds) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and then a game result image YZ (specific display) that informs the player of the game result from 0 to 80,000 or more difference balls is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and then Then, the process proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 27(A).

When the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, as shown in FIG. 33(A), first, a game stop notification image YT consisting of a character image "Game stopped due to excessive prize ball abnormality" is displayed on the display screen 50a. Ru. By displaying the game stop notification image YT on the display screen 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function has been activated.

The game stop notification image YT shown in FIG. 33(A) is displayed on the display screen 50a, and when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, the process proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 33(B). As shown in FIG. 33(B), a game result image YZ is displayed on the display screen 50a. As shown in FIG. 33(B), the game result image YZ includes a differential number of balls reached image KN, a total number of shots shot image SH (specific display), a total number of prizes won image SN (specific display), and a total number of balls won. Image SK (specific display) is included.

Here, the difference in number of balls reached image KN is an effect image that suggests information to the player that the difference in number of balls has reached 80,000. The display screen 50a displays an image KN indicating that the difference in number of balls has reached 80,000 pts, indicating "Congratulations on winning 80,000 points", thereby making it possible for the player to understand that the difference in number of balls has reached 80,000. Further, the ball difference number reaching image KN may be an effect image showing information to the player that the difference ball number has reached 80,000.

In addition, the total shot number image SH is the total number of game balls that were fired from the firing device 72 and reached the gaming area 6 by the player operating the handle 72k before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. This is a production image that suggests numerical information. By displaying the total number of shots SH showing "total number of shots: 13,600" on the display screen 50a, the player can operate the handle 72k and fire the ball before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. It is possible for the player to understand that the total number of game balls fired from the device 72 and reaching the game area 6 is 13,600. The total number of shot balls image SH shows the total number of game balls fired from the firing device 72 and reaching the game area 6 by the player operating the handle 72k before the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated. It may also be a performance image that shows information.

In addition, the total number of winnings image SN includes the winning holes (first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, general winning hole 10, This is an effect image that suggests information on the total number of winning game balls (first grand prize opening 14, second grand prize opening 15). By displaying the total number of winnings image SN indicating "Total number of winnings: 4000" on the display screen 50a, the number of winning holes placed in the gaming area 6 ( Inform the player that the total number of winning game balls (first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, general winning hole 10, first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15) is 4000. It is possible to understand it. In addition, the total number of winnings image SN includes the winning holes (first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, general winning hole 10, It may be an effect image showing information on the total number of winning game balls (first grand prize opening 14, second grand prize opening 15).

In addition, the total number of wins image SK is determined by the number of winning holes (first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, general winning hole 10, first big winning hole 14, This is an effect image that suggests information on the total number of prize balls won by the player by winning the two major winning holes 15). By displaying the total number of prize balls image SK indicating "total number of prize balls: 93,600" on the display screen 50a, the total number of prize balls acquired by the player is determined by the time the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. It is possible for the player to understand that there are 93,600 pieces. In addition, by having the player confirm the total number of shots SH displayed on the display screen 50a, which shows the "total number of shots: 13,600 shots," and the total number of shots SK, which shows the "total number of shots obtained: 93,600," By subtracting 13,600 from , 93,600, it is also possible to understand that the difference in balls has reached 80,000. In addition, the total number of wins image SK is determined by the number of winning holes (first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, general winning hole 10, first big winning hole 14, It may be an effect image that shows information on the total number of prize balls won by the player by winning the two major winning holes 15).

When the game result image YZ shown in FIG. 33(B) is displayed on the display screen 50a and a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the process proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 27(A).

8. Operation of the game control microcomputer [Main control main processing] Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 will be explained based on FIGS. 34 to 51. Note that the counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the gaming control microcomputer 101 are provided in the gaming RAM 104. When the power of the pachinko game machine PY1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided in the main control board 100 reads out the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 34 from the game ROM 103 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the main control main processing, a power-on processing is first performed (step S001).

In the power-on process (S001), for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, gaming CPU 102 settings, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for interrupt time management) settings, and when power is restored. Performs initial settings such as setting the work area of the gaming RAM 104 and resetting various flags, statuses, counters, etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the power-on process (S001) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

In addition, in the power-on process (S001), the gaming control microcomputer 101 executes RAM clearing when a signal based on the pressing operation to the RAM clearing switch 191 is input. When RAM clearing is executed, gaming information (for example, information on gaming states such as high probability states, information on the number of reserved special drawings, jackpot determination results, etc.) stored in the gaming RAM 104 is erased. However, even if the RAM clear is executed, the information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and the difference balls. The information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the number storage section 107c is not cleared.

In this power-on process (S001), a game stop flag, which will be described later, is switched to OFF when RAM clear is executed while it is ON. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed while the game stop flag is ON, it remains ON. In other words, the state of the game stop flag does not change just by turning the power back on. In this way, after the game stop flag is turned ON due to the operation of the excessive prize ball prevention function, whether or not the game is restarted is determined depending on whether or not RAM clear is executed.

Following the power-on processing (S001), interrupts are prohibited (S002), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) is executed. When each random number counter value reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, interrupts are permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, main side timer interrupt processing (S005) can be executed. The main side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, it is executed at a period of 4 msec, for example. After the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) ends and until the next main side timer interrupt processing (S005) starts, various counters are updated by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003). The value update process is executed repeatedly.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing] Next, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 35, in the main side timer interrupt process (S005), it is first determined whether the game stop flag is ON (S101). The game stop flag is turned ON when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. If the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), the processing of steps S102 to S113 is passed. This makes the game unplayable. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is OFF (NO in S101), then input processing to be described later is executed (S102).

Next, normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is executed (S103). The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. Subsequently, sensor detection processing is executed (S104).

In the sensor detection process (S104), general winning hole sensor processing, gate sensor processing, second starting hole sensor processing, first starting hole sensor processing, first big winning hole sensor processing, second big winning hole sensor processing, specific area Sensor processing, non-specific area sensor processing, and discharge port sensor processing are performed in sequence. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

In the general winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the general winning hole sensor. In addition, a command for the general winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the gate sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the gate sensor. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, the normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random number is stored in the regular symbol holding storage section 106 provided in the gaming RAM 104. . In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, 4) of normal symbol random numbers are stored in the common symbol reservation storage unit 106, the newly acquired normal symbol random number is not stored. Furthermore, a gate sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second starting port sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a special pattern 2-related random number consisting of a special pattern random number counter, a jackpot pattern type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special pattern variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the obtained special pattern 2-related random number is is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the acquired special figure 2 related random numbers are stored in order from the first area. Ru. In addition, when the special figure 2 related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired special figure 2 related random number is not stored. Further, a second pre-reading determination is performed using the acquired special figure 2 related random number and the second pre-reading determination table (see FIG. 15). In addition, according to the result of the process, a special figure 2 pending number command representing the number of special figure 2 related random numbers (special figure 2 pending number) stored in the special figure 2 pending storage unit 105b and a second look-ahead judgment are executed. A command for the second starting port sensor including a second starting winning command representing the result is generated.

In the first starting port sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a special pattern 1-related random number consisting of a special pattern random number counter, a jackpot pattern type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special pattern variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the obtained special pattern 1-related random number is is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the acquired special figure 1 related random numbers are stored in order from the first area. Ru. In addition, when the special figure 1 related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired special figure 1 related random number is not stored. Moreover, the first pre-reading determination is performed using the acquired special figure 1 related random number and the first pre-reading determination table (see FIG. 15). In addition, according to the result of the process, a special figure 1 pending number command representing the number of special figure 1 related random numbers (special figure 1 pending number) stored in the special figure 1 pending storage unit 105a and a first look-ahead judgment are executed. A command for the first starting port sensor including a first starting winning command representing the result is generated. The first pre-reading determination, the second pre-reading determination and the game control microcomputer 101 correspond to "prior determining means".

In the first big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 14a. In addition, a command for the first big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a. In addition, a command for the second big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the specific area sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a. Further, a specific area sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the non-specific area sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the non-specific area sensor 17a. Furthermore, a non-specific area sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the discharge port sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the discharge port sensor.

After the sensor detection process (S104) shown in FIG. 35, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a normal operation process (S105). In the normal operation process (S105), a normal symbol standby process, a normal symbol variation process, a normal symbol confirmation process, and an auxiliary game control process are sequentially performed. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

The normal symbol standby process is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not being performed. In the normal symbol standby process, a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the regular symbol reservation storage section 106. In addition, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current gaming state to determine a normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, a normal pattern variation start command including information regarding the result of the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern is generated. Then, based on the general pattern fluctuation time associated with the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern, the general pattern display 82 starts variable display of the general pattern.

The normal symbol variation process is a process that is performed during the variable display of the normal symbol. In the ordinary symbol variation process, the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result as the ordinary symbol fluctuation time elapses after the variable display of the ordinary symbol that is being executed starts. Then, a general pattern variation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the general pattern is generated.

The ordinary symbol confirmation process is a process that is performed when the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process, when a predetermined stopping time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the common symbol being executed starts, the common symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a winning symbol. Determine whether it exists or not. If the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table, and an auxiliary game start command indicating the start of the auxiliary game is generated.

The auxiliary game control process is a process that is performed when an auxiliary game is being played. In the auxiliary game control process, the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. In addition, a supplementary game control command is generated according to the result of the processing.

After the normal operation process (S105) shown in FIG. 35, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a difference ball number measurement process (S106), which will be described later, and a special operation process (S107), which will be described later. Subsequently, a sorting device control process for controlling the sorting device 16D is executed (S108). Note that the difference ball count measurement process (S106) and the game control microcomputer 101 correspond to the "measuring means".

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a firing control process for controlling the firing of game balls (S109). That is, by executing the firing control process (S109), the player can fire the game ball by rotating the handle 72k. On the other hand, if the firing control process (S109) is not executed, the game ball cannot be fired even if the player rotates the handle 72k.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a 7-segment display control process for controlling the display on the 7-segment display 300 (S110). Next, error processing is executed to determine an error due to magnetic detection (fraud), an error due to opening of the front door 23 or the front frame 23m, etc. (S111). In error processing (S111), it is determined whether or not illegal magnetism has been detected by the magnetic sensor. Then, a magnetic sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing. In the error process (S111), the front door sensor or the front frame sensor determines whether the front door 23 or the front frame 23m is open. Then, a frame opening command is generated according to the result of the processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes an output process to be described later (S112). Subsequently, other processing is executed (S113). As other processing (S113), for example, the special figure pending display 83 is controlled to a display mode that shows the number based on the number of special figure pending, or a timer is updated.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a power-off monitoring process when the power is cut off (S114), and ends this process. In the power outage monitoring process (S114), when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power will be cut off due to a drop in the monitoring voltage, it will update game information, information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and number of difference balls. information, game stop flag information, etc. are stored in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 104. Thereafter, prohibition of access to the gaming RAM 104 is set.

[Input processing] As shown in FIG. 36, in the input processing (S102), first, it is determined whether the special reset switch 181 is ON, that is, whether a signal based on the pressing operation of the special reset switch 181 has been received. (S201) If it is not ON (NO in S201), the process advances to step S204. On the other hand, if it is ON (YES in S201), non-erase clear processing is executed (S202). In the non-erasing clearing process (S202), information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and the number of difference balls. The information on the difference number of balls stored in the storage unit 107c is cleared. Note that even if the non-erasing clearing process (S202) is executed, the information on the total number of fired balls stored in the specific storage area (not shown) of the non-erasing storage unit 107 is not cleared. This is because, as described above, this information on the total number of fired balls is used for display on the 7-segment display 300 and for displaying the total number of fired balls image SH on the display screen 50a.

Following step S202, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S203), and the process proceeds to step S204. In this way, when the non-erasure clear command is transmitted to the performance control board 120, as shown in FIG. 30(A), the difference ball number reset notification image CLS is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 50a. In step S204, other processing is executed, and the present processing ends. In other processing (S204), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in, for example, a detection signal from a lower tray full switch that detects when the lower tray 35 is full, and stores it in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 as lower tray full data. . In addition, in other processing (S204), the game control microcomputer 101 controls the winning hole sensors (first starting hole sensor 11a, second starting hole sensor, first big winning hole sensor 14a, second big winning hole sensor 15a, In response to the detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 10a), a prize ball command for paying out the number of prize balls according to the type of winning hole is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. This prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 170 through output processing (S106) to be described later, and the prize ball payout device 73 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the type of winning hole.

[Difference ball number measurement process] As shown in FIG. 37, in the difference ball number measurement process (S106), first, detection by the first starting port sensor 11a, detection by the second starting port sensor 12a, and first big winning port sensor 14a. Based on the detection by the second big winning hole sensor 15a and the general winning hole sensor 10a, a total winning ball count process is executed to count the total number of winning balls to be paid out to the player (S301). Information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the total number of prize balls storage section 107a (see FIG. 6). Note that a total prize ball number command including information on the counted total prize ball number is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. This total prize ball number command is transmitted to the production control board 120 through output processing (S106), which will be described later. Next, a total number of fired balls counting process is executed to count the total number of fired balls based on the detection by the discharge port sensor (S302). Information on the counted total number of fired balls is stored in the total number of fired balls storage section 107b (see FIG. 6). Note that a total number of fired balls command including information on the counted total number of fired balls is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. This total number of fired balls command is sent to the production control board 120 through output processing (S106) which will be described later. Then, the difference ball number calculation process is executed to calculate the difference number of balls by subtracting the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls (S303). Information on the calculated difference number of balls is stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c (see FIG. 6). Note that a difference ball number command including information on the counted difference ball number is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. This difference ball number command is transmitted to the production control board 120 by output processing (S106) described later.

Subsequently, in step S304, it is determined whether the over-prize ball notification flag is OFF. The over-prized ball notice flag indicates that the difference in the number of balls is 70,000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S304), the process advances to step S308. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S304), it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 70,000 or more (S305). If it is less than 70,000 (NO in S305), the process advances to step S308. On the other hand, if it is 70,000 or more (YES in S305), the over-prize ball notification flag is turned on (S306), and the over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. As a result, when the super prize ball preview command is sent to the performance control board 120, the purple edge image EFa and the super prize ball preview image KY are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 28(A). .

Subsequently, in step S308, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is OFF. The over-prize ball flag indicates that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S308), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S308), it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more (S309). If it is less than 80,000 (NO in S309), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is 80,000 or more (YES in S309), the over-prize ball flag is turned on (S310), the over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S311), and step S312 Proceed to. As a result, when the over-prize ball notification command is sent to the production control board 120, the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 28(B).

Subsequently, in step S312, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON. If the jackpot flag is OFF (NO in S312), in step S313, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the over-prize ball flag is ON or not. If the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S313), the game stop flag is turned ON (S314), the game stop notification command is set (S315), and this process is ended. Further, if the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S312) or if the over-prize ball flag is OFF (NO in S313), the process is immediately ended. As a result, when the game stop notification command is sent to the performance control board 120, as shown in FIG. 33, the game stop notification image YT (see FIG. 33(A)), game result image YZ ( The difference number of balls reached image KN, the total number of prizes won image SN, the total number of shots fired image SH, and the total number of won images SK (see FIG. 33(B)) are displayed.In addition, as shown in FIG. 27(A), the display A red background image RE and an error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the screen 50a.A game stop sound is output from the speaker 52.Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 turn on in white, and the board lamp 54 turns on. All lights go out.

[Special operation processing] As shown in FIG. 38, in the special operation processing (S107), the processing regarding the special figure display 81 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 14D, second grand prize device 15D) is divided into four stages. "Special operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. Then, when the "special operation status" is "1" (YES in S1301), the game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1302), and when the "special operation status" is "2". If (NO in S1301, YES in S1303), special symbol fluctuation processing (S1304) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1301 and S1303, YES in S1305) , Special symbol confirmation processing (S1306) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "4" (all of S1301, S1303, and S1305 are NO), special electric accessory processing (S1307) is performed. Note that the special operation status is "1" in the initial setting. In addition, the special electric accessory processing (S1307) and the game control microcomputer 101 correspond to the "special game execution means".

[Special symbol standby process] As shown in FIG. 39, in the special symbol standby process (S1302), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 12 (that is, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls) is "0" or not. is determined (S1401). If the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is "0" (YES in S1401), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the second starting slot 12, the first starting It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 11 (namely, the number of reserved balls for special figure 1) is "0" (S1407). If the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is also "0" (YES in S1407), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the first starting slot 11, It is determined whether the wait flag is ON (S1416). The customer waiting flag indicates that the vehicle is in a customer waiting state. If it is ON (YES in S1416), a customer waiting measurement process to be described later is executed (S1419), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (NO in S1416), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S1417), the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1418), and this process ends.

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is not "0" (NO in S1401), that is, the memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting opening 12 (the reserved information of special drawing 2 ), when there is one or more, special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (S1402) and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing (S1403), which will be described later, are performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 by 1 (S1404). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b is shifted one place from the current position to the side where it is read out, and it corresponds to the first reservation in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b. Clear the storage area to be used (S1405). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1406) and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 2 variation start process (S1406), the special operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 to start variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, the variation start command (also referred to as the special pattern 2 variation start command) set in the special pattern 2 variation start process (S1406) includes the special pattern stop pattern data set in the special pattern 2 jackpot determination process (S1402). Information and information on the variation pattern set in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) (information including information on variation time) are included.

In addition, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is not "0" (YES in S1401 and NO in S1407), that is, there is no reservation information for special drawing 2, but the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is not "0". If there is one or more memories of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the 1 starting slot 11 (pending information of the special figure 1), the later-described special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) and the special figure 1 are executed. 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1409) is performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of special symbols 1 reserved balls by 1 (S1410). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a is shifted one place from the current position to the side where it is read out, and it corresponds to the fourth reservation in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a. Clear the storage area (the storage area furthest from the side from which the data is read) (S1411). In this way, the first special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1412) and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412), the special operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also referred to as the special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412) includes the special figure stop symbol data set in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408). Information and information on the variation pattern set in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409) (information including information on variation time) are included.

Proceeding to step S1413, it is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON or not, and if it is ON, the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1414). Then, a customer waiting counter clearing process is executed to clear (reset) the value of the customer waiting counter to "0" (S1415), and this process ends. The customer waiting counter is provided in the gaming RAM 104 and is used to measure the time that the customer waiting state continues. Note that the value of the customer waiting counter is cleared by turning on the power again, regardless of whether RAM clearing is executed or not.

[Customer waiting measurement process] As shown in FIG. 40, in the customer waiting measurement process (S1419), first, a customer waiting counter increase process is executed to increase the value of the customer waiting counter (S1420). Thereby, the game control microcomputer 101 can grasp the time period during which the customer waiting state continues based on the value of the customer waiting counter. Next, it is determined whether the customer waiting state continues for more than one hour. If it is determined that the process is not continuing (NO in S1421), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process continues (YES in S1421), a non-erasing clear process is executed (S1422), similar to the process in step S202 described above (see FIG. 33). As a result, the information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and the information on the number of difference balls stored in the difference ball number storage unit 107c are stored. The information on the number of balls that are currently in play will be cleared.

Subsequently, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S1423), and this processing is completed. In this way, when the non-erasing clear command is transmitted to the production control board 120, as shown in FIG. 30(B), the difference ball number reset notification image CLS is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 50a.

[Special figure 2 jackpot determination process (special figure 1 jackpot determination process)] The special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) and the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) are based on FIG. 41 because the processing flow is the same. I will explain them all together. As shown in FIG. 41, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) or the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), first, a special symbol random number (jackpot random number) is read out as a determination value (S1501). Specifically, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402), it is stored in the first storage area of the special figure 2 pending storage section 105b of the gaming RAM 104 (that is, the storage area corresponding to the first of the second reserved special figure). Read out the special symbol random number. In addition, in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), the special figure 1 pending storage section 105a of the gaming RAM 104 has a special figure 1 stored in the first storage area (that is, the storage area corresponding to the first reserved first special figure). Read out the special symbol random number. In addition, the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402), the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), and the game control microcomputer 101 correspond to the "determination means".

Next, a jackpot determination table (FIG. 12(A)) is set (S1502). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON, that is, whether or not the state is high probability (S1503). If it is not in a high probability state (NO in S1503), that is, if it is in a normal probability state (non-high probability state), the table for the normal probability state (jackpot judgment value is "1000" to "1219"), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot (S1504). On the other hand, if it is in a high probability state (YES in S1503), it is determined whether it is a jackpot based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "1000" to "2499") among the jackpot judgment tables (Fig. 12 (A)). It is determined whether or not (S1505).

If the result of the jackpot determination (S1504, S1505) is "jackpot", the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 12(B) (S1506). After determining the jackpot type (S1506), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1507), and the special figure stop symbol data corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S1508). finish. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination (S1504, S1505) is "lose", special pattern stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set (S1508) and the process is finished.

[Special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process)] The special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) and the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409) have the same processing flow. This will be explained together based on FIGS. 42 and 43. As shown in FIG. 42, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) or the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409), it is first determined whether the gaming state is a time-saving state (whether the time-saving flag is ON or not). (S1601)

If it is not in a time-saving state (NO in S1601), that is, in a non-time-saving state, it is then determined whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (S1602). If it is ON (YES in S1602), refer to the non-time-saving state jackpot normal table (the part corresponding to the non-time-saving state and jackpot of the special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table shown in FIG. 13 or 14), and select the special symbol. A special figure fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number (S1603).

In step S1602, if the jackpot flag is not ON, it is determined whether the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (S1604). In addition, as shown in FIG. 12(C), the reach establishment random number value is "0" to "29" in the non-time saving state, and is "0" to "9" in the time saving state. In other words, it is harder to reach when you lose in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the processing speed of special drawing reservations by allowing more no-reach losses with short fluctuation times to be selected in the time-saving state.

If the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (YES in S1604), that is, in the case of reach and loss, the reach and reach loss table in the non-time saving state (one of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 13 or FIG. 14) A special symbol variation pattern is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random number (S1605).

On the other hand, if the reach random number is not a reach establishment random number (NO in S1604), that is, in the case of a no-reach loss, the reach-no-reach loss table during the non-time saving state (the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 or 14). Of these, a special symbol variation pattern is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random number (S1606). When there is no reach, a shortening variation function is activated according to the number of balls held. In other words, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "3" or "4", the special symbol has a shorter special symbol fluctuation time than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "0" to "2". A variation pattern is selected (see FIG. 13 or 14).

In addition, in step S1601, if it is determined that the gaming state is in the time saving state (YES in S1601), as shown in FIG. Processing (S1607 to S1611) is performed in the same flow as steps S1602 to S1606 described above except for setting the part corresponding to the time saving state in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in 14.

That is, if it is a jackpot, a special pattern variation pattern is selected based on the special pattern variation pattern random number with reference to the part corresponding to the jackpot in the time saving state of FIG. 13 or 14 (S1608). Moreover, if it is a loss with a reach, a special pattern variation pattern is selected based on the special pattern variation pattern random number by referring to the part in the time saving state of FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 and corresponding to a loss with a reach. In addition, if it is a no-reach loss, a special pattern fluctuation pattern is selected based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern random number with reference to the part in the time saving state of FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 and corresponding to a no-reach loss (S1611).

After selecting the special figure variation pattern as described above, as shown in FIG. 42, the selected special figure variation pattern is set (S1612) and this process is finished. Information on the special symbol variation pattern set in step S1612 is included in the variation start command set in step S1406 or S1412 in the special symbol standby process (S1302), and is sent to the production control board 120 in the output process (S112). .

[Special symbol fluctuation processing] As shown in FIG. 44, in the special symbol fluctuation processing (S1304), first, the special symbol fluctuation time (the special symbol fluctuation time determined according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409) , see FIG. 13 or 14) has elapsed (S1801). If the time has not passed (NO in S1801), this process ends immediately. As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is continued.

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1801), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1802), and the special operation status is set to "3" (S1803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbols at a symbol (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) according to the set special symbol stop symbol data (S1804), this processing is finished.

[Special symbol confirmation process] As shown in FIG. 45, in the special symbol confirmation process (S1306), first, the stop time of the special symbol (the stop time determined according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1901). If the time has not passed (NO in S1901), this process ends immediately. As a result, the stop display of the special symbol is continued. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a game state management process to be described later is performed (S1902).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1903). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1903), an opening pattern (see FIG. 16 for details) corresponding to the type of jackpot won is set (S1904). At this time, the value of a round counter that counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game is set to the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot won. Note that the setting of the opening pattern (setting of data according to the opening pattern) may be performed for each round.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs a game state reset process following step S1904 (S1905). In the game state reset process (S1905), if the probability change flag is ON, the probability change flag is turned OFF, and if the time saving flag is ON, it is turned OFF. In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, the game is controlled to be in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Thereafter, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (S1906), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (S1907). Then, the special operation status is set to "4" (S1908), and this processing ends.

Furthermore, if the jackpot flag is not ON in step S1903 (NO in S1903), the special operation status is set to "1" (S1909) to end the process in order to not start the jackpot game.

[Game state management process] As shown in FIG. 46, in the game state management process (S1902), first, it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON or not (S2001). If it is ON (YES in S2001), decrease the value of the probability variation counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state by 1 (S2002), and check whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" or not. Determine (S2003). If it is "0" (YES in S2003), the probability change flag is turned OFF (S2004) and the process proceeds to step S2005. If the determination result in step S2001 or S2003 is NO, the process immediately advances to step S2005.

In step S2005, it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON. If it is ON (YES in S2005), the value of the time-saving counter that counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time-saving state is decreased by 1 (S2006), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" or not. (S2007) If it is "0" (YES in S2007), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2008) and the process advances to step S2009. If the determination result in step S2005 or S2007 is NO, the process advances to step S2009.

In step S2009, a gaming state designation command including information on the current gaming state (information on whether the probability change flag and time saving flag are ON or OFF), information on the value of the probability variation counter and the value of the time saving counter, etc. The data is set in the output buffer of the RAM 104, and this processing is completed.

[Special electric accessory processing (jackpot game)] The special electric accessory processing is a process for executing a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 47, in the special electric accessory processing (S1307), it is first determined whether the jackpot end flag is ON (S2701). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all openings of the jackpot devices (first jackpot device 14D, second jackpot device 15D) have been completed in the jackpot game being executed.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2701), whether or not the grand prize openings (first grand prize opening, second grand prize opening 15) are open (that is, the first grand prize device 14D or the second grand prize opening It is determined whether the device 15D is being opened (S2702). If it is not being opened (NO in S2702), whether or not the time has come to open the big winning opening, that is, whether the opening time of the jackpot has passed and the time has come to start opening the first big winning opening 14; Alternatively, it is determined whether the interval time between openings has elapsed and it is time to start the next opening (S2703).

If the determination result in step S2703 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S2703 is YES, it is determined whether the currently executing jackpot game is a jackpot game based on the V long jackpot (see FIG. 16) (S2704). If it is not a V long jackpot (NO in S2704), the process proceeds to step S2707, but if it is a V long jackpot (YES in S2704), whether or not it is the timing to start the 10th R that allows passage to specific area 16. Determine (S2705). If it is not the timing to start the 10th R (NO in S2705), the process directly advances to step S2707. On the other hand, if it is the timing to start the 10th R (YES in S2705), V valid period setting processing is performed (S2706).

In the V validity period setting process (S2706), the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a during the opening of the second grand prize opening 15 in the 10th round of the V long jackpot and for several seconds after the second grand prize opening 15 is closed. is set to the V validity period that is determined to be valid. Note that in this embodiment, a period other than this (including when a jackpot game is not executed) is set as a V invalid period in which detection of a game ball by the specific area sensor 16a is determined to be invalid. Here, determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 16a is valid means that the V flag is turned ON based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 16a. Further, determining that the detection of a game ball by the specific area sensor 16a is invalid means that the V flag is not turned on even if a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a.

In step S2707, the big winning holes (first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15) are opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 16) depending on the type of jackpot. Note that the distribution member 16k always moves in a constant motion from the start of the first round of the round game. In the opening pattern of the V long jackpot, in the 10th round, the AT opening/closing member 14k is opened so that the game ball won in the second big prize opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16 with a margin. On the other hand, in the opening pattern of the V short jackpot, in the 10th round, the distribution member 16k operates so that even if the game ball enters the second big prize opening 15, it cannot pass through the specific area 16. The opening timing of the AT opening/closing member 14k relative to the opening/closing member 14k is set.

Subsequently, in step S2708, round designation command transmission determination processing is performed, and the present processing ends. In the round designation command transmission determination process (S2708), it is determined whether or not the opening of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 14, second big winning opening 15) in step S2703 is the first opening in one round game. If so, a round designation command including information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, in this embodiment, the big prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round game. Therefore, in this step S2708, the round designation command is always set.

In step S2702 of the special electric accessory processing (S1307), if the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 14, second grand prize opening 15) is being opened, it is determined whether the closing conditions for the grand prize opening are satisfied. (S2709). In this embodiment, the closing condition is that the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening in the round game reaches the specified maximum number of prizes (in this embodiment, 10 pieces per 1R) (even if the first grand prize opening 14 is open). (If the second big winning hole 15 is open, it has been detected 10 times by the second big winning hole sensor 15a), or if the second big winning hole 15 is open, the big winning hole One of the following conditions is satisfied: the time to close has arrived (that is, a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 16) has elapsed after opening the big prize opening). Then, if the condition for closing the big prize opening is not satisfied (NO in S2709), the process ends.

On the other hand, if the closing conditions for the big winning opening (first big winning opening 14, second big winning opening 15) are satisfied (YES in S2709), the big winning opening is closed (blocked). S2710). Then, it is determined whether one round game (round interval) has ended (S2711). If it has not ended (NO in S2711), the process ends. On the other hand, when the round game ends (YES in S2711), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2712), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2713). If it is not "0" (NO in S2713), the process ends as it is in order to start the next round game.

On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S2713), a jackpot ending command is set as jackpot ending processing to end the jackpot game (S2714), and the jackpot ending is started (S2715). Then, a jackpot end flag is set (S2716) and the process ends.

Also, if the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2701 (YES in S2701), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether the ending time of the jackpot game has elapsed (S2717), and the ending time has elapsed. If not (NO in S2717), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2717), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2718). Then, a game state setting process to be described later is performed (S2719). Subsequently, the jackpot flag is turned off (S2720). Subsequently, a game stop setting process (S2721) to be described later is performed, the special operation status is set to "1" (S2722), and this process ends.

[Game state setting process] As shown in FIG. 48, in the game state setting process (S2719), it is first determined whether the V flag is ON (whether a V prize has been won during the V validity period) (S2801). If it is ON (YES in S2801), the probability change flag is turned ON (S2802), and the time saving flag is turned ON (S2803). As a result, the game is controlled to be in a high-accuracy, high-base state after the jackpot game. Subsequently, the probability change counter is set to "160" (S2804), the time saving counter is set to "160" (S2805), and the process advances to step S2808. As a result, the system is controlled to a high-accuracy, high-base state in which the number of STs is 160 and the number of time-savings is 160.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2801 that the V flag is not ON (NO in S2801), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2806). That is, at this time, the probability change flag is not turned on. As a result, the game is controlled to a low-probability-high base state after the jackpot game. Subsequently, the time saving counter is set to "100" (S2807), and the process advances to step S2808. That is, this results in control to a low-accuracy, high-base state in which the number of times of time saving is 100.

In step S2808, the gaming control microcomputer 101 specifies the gaming state including information on the gaming state just set (ON or OFF of the probability variation flag, ON or OFF of the time saving flag, information on the value of the probability variation counter, and the value of the time saving counter). The command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In this way, the gaming state setting process (S2719) ends.

[Game Stop Setting Process] As shown in FIG. 49, in the game stop setting process (S2721), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether the over-prize ball flag is ON or not (S2901). If the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S2901), the game stop flag is turned ON (S2902), the game stop notification command is set (S2903), and this process ends. Further, if the over-prize ball flag is OFF (NO in S2901), this process is immediately ended. As a result, when the game stop notification command is sent to the production control board 120, as shown in FIG. 33, the game stop notification image YT (see FIG. 33(A)) and the game result image YZ ( A differential number of balls reached image KN, a total number of prizes won image SN, a total number of shots fired image SH, a total number of won image SK (see FIG. 33(B)) are displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 27(A), a red background image RE and an error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a. Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off.

[Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 50, in the output processing (S112), outer end signal output processing to be described later is executed (S3001). Subsequently, as other output processing (S3002), the commands etc. set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in each of the above-mentioned processing are output to the production control board 120 and the payout control board 170, and this processing ends.

[Outer edge signal output processing] As shown in FIG. 51, in the outer edge signal output processing (S3001), it is determined whether the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (S3101). In other words, it is determined whether or not the difference in the number of balls has reached 70,000. If the over-prize ball notification flag is not ON (NO in S3101), the process advances to step S3103. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (YES in S3101), the outer end signal output process for over-prize ball notice is executed (S3102), and the process proceeds to step S3102. In the outer edge signal output process for super prize ball notice (S3102), an outer edge signal indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 70,000 (hereinafter referred to as "outer edge signal for super prize ball notice") is output to the main control board 100. The information is sent to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal for announcing the winning ball to the external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the gaming hall who monitors the hall computer is made aware of the situation in which the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated if the number of differential balls increases by a small amount (within 10,000) in this pachinko gaming machine PY1. is possible.

In step S3103, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether or not the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000. If the over-prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S3103), the process advances to step S3105. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S3103), the outer end signal output process for over-prize balls is executed (S3104), and the process proceeds to step S3105. In the outer edge signal output process for super prize balls (S3104), an outer edge signal indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 80,000 (hereinafter referred to as "outer edge signal for super prize balls") is output from the main control board 100. It is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the control board 170. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal for super prize ball preview to the external unit GU through parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the gaming hall monitoring the hall computer was informed that the number of differential balls in this pachinko machine PY1 had reached 80,000, and the game was executed when the high-accuracy high base state or the low-accuracy low base state ended. It is possible to understand the situation in which it becomes impossible.

In step S3105, it is determined whether the game stop flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether or not the game is no longer playable. If the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S3107), the process advances to step S3107. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S3105), the game stop outer end signal output process is executed (S3106), and the process advances to step S3107. In the game stop outer end signal output processing (S3106), the outer end signal (hereinafter referred to as the "game stop outer end signal") indicating that the game has become impossible to execute due to the activation of the over-winning ball prevention function is It is transmitted from the control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170. As a result, the external terminal board 160 transmits the game stop outer end signal to the external unit GU through parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for an employee of the gaming parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to understand the situation in which the game cannot be played due to the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function in this pachinko gaming machine PY1.

In step S3107, it is determined whether the non-erasing clear process shown in step S203 or the non-erasing clear process shown in step S1422 has been executed. That is, information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and information on the total number of fired balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c. It is determined whether or not the information on the number of differential balls is cleared. If the non-erasure clearing process is not being executed (NO in S3107), the process advances to step S3109. On the other hand, if the non-erasing clear process is being executed (YES in S3107), the reset outer end signal output process is executed (S3108), and the process advances to step S3109. In the reset outer edge signal output process (S3108), an outer edge signal indicating that the number of differential balls has been reset (hereinafter referred to as "reset outer edge signal") is transmitted from the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. and is transmitted to the external terminal board 160. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the reset outer end signal to the external unit GU through parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for an employee of the gaming parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to understand the situation in which the number of differential balls has been reset in the pachinko gaming machine PY1. In addition, a dedicated signal line is connected to the main control board 100, and through this dedicated signal line, an outer end signal for super prize ball notice, an outer end signal for super prize ball, and an outer end signal for stopping the game are transmitted. , a reset outer end signal is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170.

9. Operation of production control microcomputer Next, the operation of production control microcomputer 121 will be explained based on FIGS. 52 to 57. Note that counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 121 are provided in the performance RAM 124.

[Sub-control main processing] The performance control microcomputer 121 provided in the performance control board 120 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 52 from the performance ROM 123 when the power is turned on. Note that the counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. that appear in the operation explanation of the performance control microcomputer 121 are provided in the performance RAM 124.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the sub-control main process, it is determined whether the sub-side power-off flag (a flag that is turned ON when the power is cut off) is ON and the contents of the performance RAM 124 are normal (S4001). If this determination result is NO, that is, if the sub-side power-off flag is not ON, or if the contents of the performance RAM 124 are not normal even if the sub-side power-off flag is ON, the contents of the performance RAM 124 are Initialize (S4002) and proceed to step S4003.

On the other hand, if the determination result in step S4001 is YES, that is, if the sub-side power-off flag is turned ON due to a power outage, but the contents of the performance RAM 124 are maintained normally, then the RAM is cleared. It is determined whether a notification command has been received (S4013). If the RAM clear notification command has been received (YES in S4013), the gaming RAM 104 of the gaming control board 100 has been cleared. Therefore, the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 is cleared (S4002), and the process proceeds to step S4003. On the other hand, if the RAM clear notification command has not been received (NO in S4013), the process proceeds to step S4003 without clearing the performance RAM 124.

In step S4003, other initial settings are performed. Other initial settings include, for example, settings for the CPU 122 for presentation, settings for SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), and the like. Further, if the sub-side power-off flag is ON, it is turned OFF.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4004), and random number update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number update process (S4005), the values of various performance determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various performances are updated. As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for performance determination regarding various performances can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the main control board 100 described above. When updating, the random numbers may be added by 2 instead of being added by 1. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the main control board 100 described above.

When the random number update processing is completed, command transmission processing is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process (S4006), various commands stored in the output buffer in the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140. The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display screen 50a (performs various effects using the image) in accordance with the received command. In addition to the various performances performed by the image control board 140, the production control board 120 also outputs audio from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (executes various sound productions using audio), and performs lamp control. Through the circuit 151, the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are made to emit light (to perform various light emitting effects by emitting light), and the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 are actuated (to perform various movable body effects by movement). do) In this way, various performances (fluctuating performances, hold performances, movable body performances, operation performances, look-ahead performances, other preview performances, opening performances accompanying special games, open game performances, ending performances, customer waiting performances, performance modes) control, etc.) is realized.

The production control microcomputer 121 then permits an interrupt (S4007). Thereafter, steps S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time various commands sent from the main control board 100 are input to the production control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt processing (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output processing (S112) of the main control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124. This reception interrupt processing is executed with priority over other interrupt processing (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt process] The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 1 msec period is input to the production control board 120. In the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), as shown in FIG. 53, input processing (S4101), light emission data output processing (S4102), movable body control processing (S4103), and watchdog timer processing (S4104) are sequentially performed.

In the input processing (S4101), operations on operation parts that can be operated by the player, such as the normal button detection switch 40a and the special button detection switch 41a, are detected, and a command is set or performance data is created according to the detection result. or In the light emission data output process (S4102), the frame lamp 53 and In order to cause a lamp such as the board lamp 54 to emit light, light emission data (lamp data) is referred to. Then, the lamp control circuit 151 is controlled based on the light emission data. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, etc. to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data. In the movable body control process (S4103), the movable units 55, 56, and 58 are operated at predetermined timings based on the production data created in the input process (S4101), production data creation process (S4204), etc. described later. Refer to the drive data to perform the moving object performance. Then, the lamp control circuit 151 is controlled based on the drive data. That is, the production control microcomputer 121 operates the movable devices 55, 56, 58 in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. In the watchdog timer process (S4104), the watchdog timer is reset.

[10ms timer interrupt process] The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the production control board 120. In the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012), as shown in FIG. Perform sequentially.

In the received command analysis process (S4201), the command stored in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124 by the receive interrupt process (S4010) is analyzed, and the processing corresponding to the command (for example, effect selection, effect mode setting, command set, etc.). In the effect timer update process (S4202), a timer for measuring time related to each effect is updated. For example, in the effect timer update process (S4202), the start timing and end timing of the valid operation period of the operation units such as the normal button 40 and the special button 41 are measured. In the audio control process (S4203), based on the processing results of the input process (S4101) and the received command analysis process (S4201), audio data (data that controls the output of audio from the speaker 52) is created and the audio control circuit 161 control is performed. In the performance data creation process (S4204), performance data is created based on the processing result of the received command analysis process (S4201).

Here, an example of processing when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a command from the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. The command received by the production control microcomputer 121 is a variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command or special figure 2 variation start command). If the production control microcomputer 121 determines that a variation start command has been received in the received command analysis process (S4201), the production control microcomputer 121 performs variation based on the special figure variation pattern indicated by the command as a process when receiving the variation start command. A production pattern (sub variation pattern) of the production is selected, information on the sub variation pattern is set, and a variation production start command including information on the sub variation pattern is set in the output buffer. For example, if the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is SP variation (variation pattern associated with SP reach), select a sub variation pattern that performs SP reach, and use the variation production start command corresponding to that sub variation pattern. set in the output buffer. After that, each process (command transmission process (S4004), light emission data output process (S4102), movable body control process (S4103), voice control process (S4203), etc.) is executed to correspond to the selected sub fluctuation pattern. A fluctuating performance is realized. The processing flow for realizing such performances is basically the same for other performances such as performances associated with special games, customer waiting performances, look-ahead performances, so-called preview performances accompanying such fluctuations, and control of performance modes. It's the same.

[Received command analysis process] In the received command analysis process (S4201) of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is determined (S4301), and if it has been received, the start winning process (S4302), which will be described later, is performed.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command or special figure 2 fluctuation start command) has been received from the main control board 100 (S4303), and determines whether or not it has been received. For example, a variable effect start process to be described later is performed (S4304).

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a special symbol fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4305), and if it has received it, performs a fluctuation performance end process (S4306). In the variable performance end process (S4306), the performance control microcomputer 121 ends the special symbol fluctuation performance (stops the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3, and performs a stop display).

In the variation production end process (S4306), the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special symbol fluctuation stop command, and based on the analysis result, appropriately ends the special symbol variation production (production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and small symbols). A special symbol variation production end command for stopping the variation display of KZ1 to KZ3 is set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124. When the image control board 140 receives the special symbol variation production end command, it ends the special symbol variation production that is being executed (stops the variation production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3).

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4307), and if so, performs opening performance selection processing (S4308). In the opening performance selection process (S4308), the opening command is analyzed and, based on the analysis result, the pattern (content) of the opening performance to be executed during the opening of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an opening performance start command for starting an opening performance using the selected opening performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a round game command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4309), and if so, performs a round performance selection process (S4310). In the round performance selection process (S4310), the round game command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (content) of the round performance to be executed during the round game of the jackpot game is selected. Then, a round performance start command for starting a round performance using the selected round performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4311), and if so, performs an ending effect selection process (S4312). In the ending effect selection process (S4312), the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command and selects the pattern (content) of the jackpot ending effect to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game based on the analysis result. Then, a jackpot ending effect start command for starting an ending effect using the selected jackpot ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a game stop notification command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4313), and if it has received it, performs a game stop notification display process (S4314). In the game stop notification display process (S4314), the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the game stop notification command, and sets the game stop notification display start command to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 based on the analysis result. As a result, based on the game stop notification display start command sent to the image control board 140, the game stop notification image YT (see FIG. 59(A)) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) on the display screen 50a. Then, the game stop notification image YT (see FIG. 33(A)), the game result image YZ (the difference number of balls reached image KN, the total number of shots SH, the total number of acquired images SK, see FIG. 33(A)) are displayed. After a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX are displayed (see FIG. 27(A)). Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs other processing (S4315) based on the received command other than the above-mentioned commands (for example, processing for performing a performance accompanying the fluctuating display of normal symbols, etc.). Then, the received command analysis process (S4201) ends.

[Start-up winning process] First, in the starting-winning process (S4302) of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2 start port sensor command) is analyzed (S4401). The command for the first starting port sensor includes information representing the number of special figure 1 related random numbers (number of special figure 1 reservations) stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, information on the result of the first look-ahead determination, and If the result of the first look-ahead determination is a jackpot, information on the type of jackpot symbol, etc. is included. In addition, the command for the second starting port sensor includes information representing the number of special figure 2 related random numbers (special figure 2 pending number) stored in the special figure 2 pending storage unit 105b, and information on the result of the second look-ahead determination. , and if the result of the first pre-reading determination is a jackpot, information on the type of jackpot symbol, etc. are included.

After step S4401, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the result of the pre-read determination indicated by the result analyzed in step S4401 is a jackpot (S4402). If the result of the look-ahead determination is a jackpot (YES in S4402), the process advances to step 4403. On the other hand, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss (NO in S4402), the process advances to step S4406.

If the result of the look-ahead determination indicated by the analysis result in step S4401 is a jackpot (YES in S4402), the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the result of the analysis in step S4401 indicates that it is possible to win in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed. Based on the information on the number of prize balls and the information on the current number of difference balls stored in the production difference ball number storage unit 124c, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed is determined by the current number of difference balls. It is determined whether the value added to is 80000 or more (S4403).

In step S4403 (specific determination means), the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that if the sum of the current number of difference balls and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed is 80,000 or more (in step S4403) YES), selects a performance symbol in the special symbol mode (S4404), sets a game stop advance suggestion start command to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 (S4405), and proceeds to step S4406. As a result, depending on the pre-read performance content indicated by the game stop advance suggestion start command sent to the image control board 140, any one of the left performance pattern EZ1, middle performance pattern EZ2, or right performance pattern EZ3 is selected. will be displayed in a special pattern. Therefore, by displaying any one of the left performance symbol EZ1, middle performance symbol EZ2, or right performance symbol EZ3 in a special symbol mode, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated and the game is stopped. It is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the game will be lost (see FIGS. 31(B) and 31(D)).

In addition, if the result of the look-ahead determination indicated by the analysis result in step S4401 is a loss (NO in S4402), the production control microcomputer 121 determines the current number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed. If the value added to the difference in the number of balls does not exceed 80,000 (NO in S4403), the process directly advances to step S4406.

Subsequently, in step S4406, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether to execute another pre-read performance. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines to execute another prefetch effect (YES in S4406), it sets a prefetch start command to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S4407). Further, if it is determined that other prefetch effects are not to be executed (NO in S4406), this process is ended as is. Other pre-read effects include a pending icon change effect that changes the display mode of the pending icon HA, a continuous preview effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols, and the like.

When the prefetch effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4406), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out and a pre-read effect using the image is performed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. In addition, while the image control board 140 is performing the prefetch effect using images, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls audio according to the prefetch effect content indicated by the prefetch effect start command sent to the image control board 140. Sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (executing a pre-reading effect using audio), and the frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via the lamp control circuit 151 (performing a pre-reading effect using light emission), and the display is movable on the board. It is possible to operate the body 55k and the under-panel movable body 56k (execute a pre-reading effect by operation).

[Variation effect start processing] As shown in FIG. 57, in the variation effect start process (S4304) of this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 121 first analyzes the variation start command (S4501). The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation pattern (Figure 11, Figure 12, Figure 16), information on the special pattern stop symbol data based on the jackpot determination, etc., and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the execution schedule. It includes information such as the number of prize balls expected to be won in the jackpot game.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command (S4502). If the result of the jackpot determination in step S4502 is a jackpot (YES in S4502), the process advances to step S4503. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the process directly advances to step S4505.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 calculates the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command, and the current difference ball number stored in the performance difference ball number storage unit 124c. It is determined whether the value added to the number is 80,000 or more (S4503). In step S4503, if the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls is 80,000 or more (YES in S4503), the final result will be As the performance pattern EZ to be stopped and displayed, a performance pattern EZ in a special pattern mode (a pattern mode in which a part showing a number (number part) and a part showing an angel character are combined) is selected (S4504). This makes it possible to suggest to the player that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is controlled to be impossible (see FIG. 31(F)).

On the other hand, the performance control microcomputer 121 adds the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed when the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss or from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command to the current number of difference balls. If the value is less than 80,000 (NO in S4503), the performance pattern EZ to be finally stopped and displayed in the special symbol variation performance is selected (S4505). Specifically, in addition to obtaining a random number for determining the production design, one table is selected based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command from among multiple tables classified according to the presence or absence of reach, and the selection is performed. Using the created table, a performance symbol is selected by determining the acquired random number for determining a performance symbol. As a result, the combination of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 (for example, "7, 7, 7", etc.) to be finally stopped and displayed is determined. In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 also selects the small symbol KZ to be finally stopped and displayed in the special symbol variation production in the variation production start process (S4304). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires a random number for determining a small symbol, selects one table based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command, and uses the selected table to display the acquired small symbol. A small symbol is selected by determining a random number for symbol determination. As a result, the combination of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 (for example, "7, 7, 7", etc.) to be finally stopped and displayed is determined.

Subsequently, in the sub variation pattern selection process (S4506), the production control microcomputer 121 associates the production contents of the special figure variation production based on the set production mode and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command. A sub-fluctuation pattern determination table is selected for performing sub-fluctuation pattern determination for determining the sub-fluctuation pattern that has been determined. A plurality of sub variation pattern determination tables are provided in association with production modes and special symbol variation patterns. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one sub variation pattern determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern. In each sub-fluctuation pattern determination table, the value of the random number for sub-fluctuation pattern determination (sub-fluctuation pattern determination value) is distributed to one or more sub-fluctuation patterns so as to achieve a predetermined distribution rate (%). . Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 obtains the value indicated by the sub-variation pattern determination random number counter as a sub-variation pattern determination random number, and performs sub-variation pattern determination based on the obtained sub-variation pattern determination random number. Note that the random number for determining the sub-variation pattern takes a value in the range from "0" to "99".

In the sub-variation pattern determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 collates the obtained sub-variation pattern determination random number with the selected sub-variation pattern table, determines the sub-variation pattern, and inputs data representing the determined sub-variation pattern. Set it in the performance RAM 124. Once the special symbol variation production pattern is decided, the time of the variation production, the variation display mode of the production symbol, the presence or absence of the reach production, the content of the reach production, the presence or absence of the operation production, the content of the operation production, production development configuration, and the background of the production pattern. The details of the special figure variation production, including the type of etc., will be determined.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects a preview performance (S4506). Specifically, in addition to obtaining a random number for determining the preview performance, one table is selected based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command from among multiple tables classified according to the presence or absence of reach, and the selection is performed. The preview performance is selected by determining the obtained random number for determining the preview performance using the table obtained. As a result, the contents of the preview performances such as so-called step-up preview performances and chance-up preview performances are determined.

Following S4506, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a variable performance start command to start a variable performance in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 based on the selected performance symbol, sub-variation pattern, and preview performance. (S4507), this process ends. When the fluctuation performance start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4006), the special symbol fluctuation performance is started in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol on the display screen 50a.

In addition, the special figure variation effect start command includes, in addition to the special figure variation effect using images performed on the image display device 50, the special figure variation effect using audio outputted from the speaker 52, and the special figure variation effect using light emitted from the frame lamp 53. It includes the performance contents of the figure fluctuation performance and the performance contents of the special figure fluctuation performance based on the actions performed by the upper board movable body 55k and the lower board movable body 56k.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special symbol variation production content indicated by the special symbol variation production start command sent to the image control board 140 while the special symbol variation production using images is being performed by the image control board 140. In response to this, the speaker 52 outputs a sound via the audio control circuit 161 (executes a special figure variation effect using sound), and causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light via the lamp control circuit 151 (executes a special figure variation effect by emitting light). The above-board movable body 55k and the under-board movable body 56k are actuated (a special figure variable effect is executed by the movement).

10. Effects of this form When the difference number of balls reaches 80,000 (standard number), or if the difference ball number becomes equal to or greater than the standard number during a jackpot game, the timing when the jackpot game ends is reached. Since the prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is stopped, it is possible to prevent excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player. However, it is difficult for the player to not be able to know in advance that there is a possibility that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function will be activated and the game will be stopped. Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, based on the result of the pre-read determination, the over-prized ball advance suggestion performance that suggests that the over-prized ball abnormality prevention function may be activated, It is possible to know in advance that the abnormality prevention function will be activated and the game will be stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being in a bad situation because the player cannot know in advance that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function may be activated and the game will be stopped. becomes.

In addition, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, based on the result of the pre-read determination, in step S4403 of the starting opening winning process (S4302), it is possible to win in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed based on the result of the pre-read judgment. If it is not determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls to the current number of difference balls is 80,000 or more, the over-prize ball advance suggestion performance is not executed. On the other hand, based on the result of the look-ahead determination, in step S4403 of the starting opening winning process (S4302), the number of prize balls that can be won in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed is set to the current number of difference balls based on the result of the look-ahead determination. If it is determined that the added value is 80,000 or more, an over-prize ball advance suggestion performance is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately execute the over-prize ball advance suggestion performance according to the determination result in step S4403 in the start winning process (S4302).

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the over-prize ball advance suggestion performance is executed, the pattern mode of the performance pattern EZ that is definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a becomes a special pattern mode. As a result, by drawing attention to the special symbol mode of the production symbol EZ that is definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a, it is possible to warn in advance that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function may be activated and the game will be stopped. This makes it possible to make it easier for people to understand. Therefore, depending on the pattern of the effect pattern EZ that is definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a that is easy for the player to pay attention to, there is a possibility that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function will be activated and the game will be stopped. Since the player cannot know this in advance, it is possible to further prevent a situation where the player is in a bad situation.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, after the over-prize ball advance suggestion performance is executed, the special figure 1 related random number resulting from the execution of the over-prize ball advance suggestion performance is stored in the special figure 1 pending storage unit 105a. is cleared, the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect is started based on the result of the judgment of whether or not it will be a jackpot in the special figure judgment process, and the over-prize ball prevention function is activated after the jackpot game scheduled to be executed ends. An over-prize ball preview performance suggesting that this will happen will be performed. In the over-prize ball preview performance, the left performance symbol EZ1, middle performance symbol EZ2, and right performance symbol EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed in the special pattern mode used in the over-prize ball advance suggestion performance. As a result, the special symbol mode of the left effect pattern EZ1, middle effect pattern EZ2, and right effect pattern EZ3, which are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a, has an impact, and the jackpot game to be executed ends. It becomes possible to know that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated at the right timing and that the game will be stopped. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent a situation in which it is impossible to know in advance that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function will be activated and the game will be stopped after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is stopped, the display screen 50a displays the pachinko gaming machine until the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. A game result image YZ notifying the game result of PY1 is displayed. This not only provides the player with a pachinko gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player, but also prevents the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function from being activated by the game result image YZ displayed on the display screen 50a. It becomes possible to check the game results of the pachinko game machine PY1. Therefore, it is possible to urge a player who has grasped the gaming results of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 until the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated to play the game on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 again next time, for example. .

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the game is stopped, and the total number of shots shown on the display screen 50a is ``total number of shots: 13,600 shots.'' It becomes possible for the player to confirm the image SH. As a result, it is possible for the player to confirm how far the game ball fired from the firing device 72 has reached the gaming area 6 by operating the handle 72k before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. becomes. As a result, the player who has confirmed the total number of shots SH displayed on the display screen 50a can understand how much he has played with the pachinko machine PY1, and the player can use the pachinko machine PY1 next time as well. It becomes possible to encourage the player to play the game.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated by the total number of winnings image SK consisting of the character image "Total number of winnings: 93,600" displayed on the display screen 50a. It becomes possible for the player to confirm the total number of prize balls he has won. As a result, players who have confirmed the total number of prize balls won by placing game balls in the first grand prize opening 14, second grand prize opening 15, etc. before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. , it becomes possible to urge the player to play the game at the pachinko game machine PY1 again next time.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated by the total winning number image SN consisting of the character image "Total winning number: 1000" displayed on the display screen 50a. The total number of game balls that have been won into the first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, general winning hole 10, first big winning hole 14, and second big winning hole 15 arranged in the gaming area 6 until now. It becomes possible to confirm the number. As a result, the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, the general winning hole 10, the first big winning hole 14, and the second big winning hole 15 can be won before the excessive winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated. It is possible to make the player understand whether it was easy or not, and to urge him or her to play the game at the pachinko game machine PY1 next time as well.

11. Example of change Below, an example of change will be explained. In addition, in the description of the modification example, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the above embodiment are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be combined as appropriate. Further, the technical features in the above embodiments and the modified examples described below can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification.

<First modification example>
In the above embodiment, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, and the game result image YZ displayed on the display screen 50a always includes the difference ball number attained image KN, the total number of shots fired image SH, the total number of prizes won image SN, and the total number of balls won. The number of acquired images SK was included. When the game result image YZ is displayed on the display screen 50a, the difference number of balls reached image KN, the total number of shots shot image SH, the total number of prizes won image SN, and the total number of won images SK are displayed, thereby preventing abnormality of over-winning balls. Information on the total number of game balls fired from the firing device 72 that reached the game area 6 before the function was activated, and information on the total number of game balls that were placed in the game area 6 before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function was activated. Information on the total number of winning game balls (first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, general winning hole 10, first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15) and over-winning balls Before the abnormality prevention function is activated, the player wins a prize in the winning opening (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, general winning opening 10, first grand winning opening 14, second grand winning opening 15). The player was able to obtain four pieces of information: information on the total number of prize balls won by the player, and information on the difference in number of balls reaching 80,000. However, the above embodiment has the following problems.

As described above, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game result image YZ displayed on the display screen 50a includes the total number of shots SH, the total number of prizes won image SN, and the total number of won images SK. Among the three types of information, there is a risk that the player may obtain information that the game parlor employee does not want the player to obtain.

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first modification, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, an employee of the game parlor can determine whether or not the total number of shots SH is displayed, and whether the total number of prizes won image SN is displayed or not. It is configured such that whether or not to display the total acquisition number image SK can be set. Specifically, if the normal button 40 is pressed five times within 30 seconds after RAM clearing is started, an initial function setting image FS (see FIG. 58(A)), which will be described later, is displayed. Then, the employee of the gaming parlor switches from displaying the initial function setting image FS to displaying the gaming result image display setting image SX (see FIG. 58(C)), which will be described later. It is possible to set whether to display the shot number image SH, whether to display the total winning number image SN, and whether to display the total winning number image SK.

Next, based on FIG. 58, the settings of whether to display the total shot number image SH, whether to display the total winning number image SN, and whether to display the total winning number image SK will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), when RAM clearing starts after the power is turned on, the display screen 50a displays the message ``Please wait for a while.Press the button five times to display the initial function setting image.'' A notification image RC is displayed. By displaying the RAM clear notification image RC on the display screen 50a, it is possible to make the employees of the game parlor aware that the RAM clear has been executed. The RAM clear notification image RC is displayed for only 30 seconds after RAM clearing is started. Therefore, when an employee of the game parlor presses the normal button 40 five times while the RAM clear notification image RC is displayed, the initial function setting image FS can be displayed as shown in FIG. 58(B). It is.

In this way, in the first modification, it is possible to display the initial function setting image FS on the condition that RAM clearing has been executed, and to determine whether or not the total number of shots image SH included in the game result image YZ is displayed; It is possible to set whether to display the total winning number image SN and whether to display the total winning number image SK. That is, if the RAM clear is not executed, it is possible to determine whether the total number of shots SH included in the game result image YZ is displayed, the total number of prizes won image SN is displayed, and the total number of wins image SK is displayed. It cannot be changed.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), in the initial function setting image FS, there is an item indicating ``switch to setting screen'' and an item indicating ``initialization'' in ``gaming result image display setting'', and an item indicating ``initialization''. There is an item in ``Production Settings'' that indicates ``Switch to Settings Screen.'' Therefore, when the employee of the game parlor uses the select button to move the cursor to various items and presses the normal button 40, the game result image display setting image SX shown in FIG. 58(C) or other effect setting image is displayed. (not shown) can be displayed. In addition, when the cursor is placed on the "initialization" item and the normal button 40 is pressed while the initial function setting image SF is displayed, the display of the total number of shots SH included in the game result image YZ, It is possible to initialize settings for displaying or not displaying the total winning number image SN and displaying or not displaying the total winning number image SK. Furthermore, when the cursor is placed on the "return" item and the normal button 40 is pressed while the initial function setting image SF is being displayed, the display of the initial function setting image FS is ended. Thereafter, if the RAM clearing has been completed, a customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen 50a.

As shown in 58(C), in the game result image display setting image SX, there is an item indicating "ON" and an item indicating "OFF" in "Set ON/OFF for display of total number of shots". There are items. Therefore, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "ON", the total number of shots image SH is set to be displayed when the game result image YZ is displayed. On the other hand, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "OFF", the total number of shots image SH is set not to be displayed when the game result image YZ is displayed.

In addition, as shown in 58(C), in the gaming result image display setting image SX, there is an item indicating "ON" and an item indicating "OFF" in "Set ON/OFF for display of total winnings". There is an item indicating. Therefore, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "ON", the setting is made such that when the game result image YZ is displayed, the total winnings image SN is displayed. On the other hand, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "OFF", the total winning number image SN is set not to be displayed when the game result image YZ is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in 58(C), in the gaming result image display setting image SX, there is an item indicating "ON" and an item indicating "OFF" in "Set ON/OFF for display of total number of acquisitions". There is an item indicating. Therefore, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "ON", the total number of acquisitions image SK is set to be displayed when the game result image YZ is displayed. On the other hand, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "OFF", the setting is made such that the total number of acquisitions image SK is not displayed when the game result image YZ is displayed.

In addition, as shown in 58(C), when the cursor is placed on the "Back" item and the normal button 40 is pressed while the game result image display setting image SX is displayed, the set contents are determined. The display of the game result image display setting image SX will end, and the display will return to the initial function setting image FS.

<Operations and effects of the first modification>
According to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first modification, on the condition that RAM clearing has been executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to display the total number of shots SH included in the game result image YZ, and whether to display the total number of winnings image SN. It was possible to set whether the total number of acquired images SK should be displayed or not. As a result, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is controlled to be disabled, it is possible to determine whether or not the total shot number image SH is included in the game result image YZ displayed on the display screen 50a, and the total winning amount. Whether or not the number images SN are included and whether or not the total number of acquired images SK are included can be set at the discretion of the employees of the gaming parlor. Therefore, the game result image YZ that is displayed when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is stopped allows players to obtain information that game parlor employees do not want players to obtain. It is possible to make adjustments to prevent this from occurring.

<Second modification example>
In the above embodiment, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the game result image YZ (total shot number image SH, total won number image SN , total number of balls acquired image SK, and difference number of balls reached image KN) were displayed. However, there is no need to be limited to this, and this is just an example. For example, in the second modification, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, by the time the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, after the first hit (big hit in the normal gaming state), An acquired prize ball number image HD (see Fig. 59 (B)) that suggests the total number of game balls acquired in the jackpot game for each first hit before returning to the normal gaming state is displayed, and after that, an over-prize ball image is displayed. By the time the abnormality prevention function is activated, the total number of winning balls image HS (see FIG. 59(C)) indicating the total number of game balls won in the jackpot game for each first hit from the 1st to the 10th time is displayed. It will be displayed. In addition, the acquired prize ball count image HD is calculated from the first hit (jackpot in normal gaming mode) until the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated, and after the first hit (jackpot in normal gaming mode) until the normal gaming mode returns again. It may be a display image that shows the total number of game balls acquired for each first hit. In addition, the total number of winning balls image HS is a display image that shows the total number of game balls won in the jackpot game for each first hit from the 1st to the 10th time before the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated. It's okay.

Next, based on FIG. 59, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the second modification, the game results of the pachinko game machine PY1 displayed on the display screen 50a will be explained. A display image that suggests information will be explained. In addition, in the second modification, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, a game stop notification image YT (Fig. 59 (A)) is displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds), then the acquired award ball count image HD (refer to FIG. 59 (B)) is displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds), and then the total The prize ball number HS (see FIG. 59(C)) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and then the process proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 27(A).

In the second modification, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, first, a game stop notification image YT is displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 59(A). By displaying the game stop notification image YT on the display screen 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function has been activated.

When the game stop notification image YT shown in FIG. 59(A) is displayed on the display screen 50a and a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, the game stop notification image YT shown in FIG. 59(A) is displayed. The display switches to the acquired award ball count image HD shown in (B). In the acquired award ball count image HD shown in FIG. 16,350 pieces 10,750 pieces.'' In the acquired prize ball count image HD, the number of game balls acquired in jackpot games after the first hit every 10 times before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, and before returning to the normal playing state again. The number of each is shown.

Specifically, from "1,14,850" shown in the acquired prize ball number image HD until the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, after the first hit, the game returns to the normal gaming state again. It is possible for the player to understand that the number of game balls that have been won in the jackpot game so far is 14,850. In addition, from "2,3450 balls" shown in the acquired prize ball number image HD until the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, after the second first hit, and before returning to the normal gaming state, it will be a jackpot hit. It is possible for the player to understand that the number of game balls acquired in the game is 3,450. In addition, from "3,14850 balls" shown in the acquired prize ball number image HD to the time when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, after the third first hit, it is necessary to hit the jackpot before returning to the normal gaming state again. It is possible for the player to understand that the number of game balls acquired in the game is 14,850. In addition, from "4,9450 balls" shown in the acquired prize ball number image HD, until the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, after the 4th first hit, it will be necessary to hit the jackpot before returning to the normal gaming state again. It is possible for the player to understand that the number of game balls acquired in the game is 9450. In addition, from "5,16350 balls" shown in the acquired prize ball number image HD, until the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, after the first hit of the 5th time, it is necessary to hit the jackpot before returning to the normal gaming state again. It is possible for the player to understand that the number of game balls acquired in the game is 16,350. In addition, from "6,4350 balls" shown in the acquired prize ball number image HD until the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, after the 6th first hit, it will be necessary to hit the jackpot before returning to the normal gaming state again. It is possible for the player to understand that the number of game balls acquired in the game is 4,350. In addition, from "7,4350 balls" shown in the acquired prize ball number image HD to the 7th first hit before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, it is necessary to hit the jackpot before returning to the normal gaming state again. It is possible for the player to understand that the number of game balls acquired in the game is 4,350. In addition, from "8,8850 balls" shown in the acquired prize ball number image HD until the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, it will be the 8th first hit, and after that, it will be a jackpot hit before returning to the normal gaming state again. It is possible for the player to understand that the number of game balls acquired in the game is 4,350. In addition, from "9,16350 balls" shown in the acquired prize ball number image HD, until the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, it will be the 9th first hit, and after that, it will be a jackpot hit before returning to the normal gaming state again. It is possible for the player to understand that the number of game balls acquired in the game is 16,350. Furthermore, from "10,750 balls" shown in the acquired prize ball number image HD, by the time the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, after the 10th first hit, it is necessary to hit the jackpot before returning to the normal gaming state again. It is possible for the player to understand that the number of game balls acquired in the game is 750.

The acquired prize pitch number image HD shown in FIG. 59(B) is displayed on the display screen 50a, and after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the acquired prize pitch number image HD shown in FIG. 59(B) is displayed. When the process is finished, the total award ball count image HS shown in FIG. 59(C) is displayed. In the total award ball number image HS shown in FIG. 59(C), "93,600" is shown. In the total number of prize balls acquired image HS, the number of games won in jackpot games from the 1st to the 10th hit before the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated and before returning to the normal playing state again. The total number of balls is suggested. The total number of prize balls acquired image HS shown in FIG. It is possible for the player to understand that the total number of acquired game balls is 93,600.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the total award ball number image HS shown in FIG. 59(C) is displayed on the display screen 50a, the process proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 27(A).

<Operations and effects of the second modification>
In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the second modification, the game is stopped by the activation of the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function, so it is possible to provide the player with a pachinko game machine PY1 that does not award excessive prize balls. ing. However, the game may be stopped due to the activation of the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function, which may cause the player to feel dissatisfied. Therefore, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the acquired prize ball number image HD displayed on the display screen 50a determines how many jackpots each time the first hit occurs before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. It becomes possible for the player to check whether he has acquired game balls in the game. Furthermore, according to the total number of prize balls image HS displayed on the display screen 50a, by the time the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, after the first hit from the 1st to the 10th time, the normal gaming state is resumed. It is also possible to confirm the total number of game balls acquired in the jackpot game before returning. Thereby, by displaying the acquired prize ball number image HD and the total acquired prize ball number image HS on the display screen 50a, it is possible to give the player even a slight sense of accomplishment. Therefore, it is possible to have a positive influence on the player's playing at the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the second modified example from next time onwards.

<Third modification example>
In the second modified example, when the over-prized ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the acquired prize pitch number image HD (see FIG. 59(B)) is displayed, and then the total acquired prize pitch number image HS (see FIG. 59(C)) was displayed. However, there is no need to be limited to this. In the third modification, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the difference between balls after the first hit and before returning to the normal gaming state is required before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. The difference number image SD (see Figure 60 (B)) that suggests the number of balls for each first hit is displayed, and after that, the first hit from the 1st to the 10th time is displayed before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. A total difference ball number image SS (see FIG. 60(C)) indicating the total number of difference balls for each time is displayed. The difference number of balls image SD may be a display image that shows the difference number of balls for each first hit after the first hit until the normal gaming state returns again before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. good. Further, the total difference number of balls image SS may be a display image showing the total number of difference balls for each first hit from the first to the tenth time before the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated.

Next, based on FIG. 60, a display image displayed on the display screen 50a when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the third modification will be described. In addition, in the third modification, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, a game stop notification image YT (Fig. 60 (A)) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), then the difference ball number image SD (see FIG. 60 (B)) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and then the total number of difference balls The image SS (see FIG. 60(C)) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and then the process proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 27(A).

In the third modification, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, first, a game stop notification image YT is displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 60(A). By displaying the game stop notification image YT on the display screen 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function has been activated.

When the game stop notification image YT shown in FIG. 60(A) is displayed on the display screen 50a and a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, the game stop notification image YT shown in FIG. 60(A) is displayed. The display switches to the difference ball number image SD shown in (B). In the difference ball number image SD shown in FIG. 60(B), "1,12,000 pieces 2,2800 pieces 3,14,000 pieces 4,8500 pieces 5,15,000 pieces 6,3000 pieces 7,3000 pieces 8,7000 pieces 9,14000 pieces" 10,700 pieces.'' The difference number of balls image SD shows the number of difference balls after the first hit every 10 times until the normal gaming state returns again until the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. There is.

Specifically, from "1,12,000" shown in the difference ball number image SD until the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, after the first hit, until the normal gaming state returns again. It is possible for the player to understand that the difference in the number of balls is 12,000. In addition, from "2,2800" shown in the difference ball number image SD to the time when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the difference between balls after the second first hit and before returning to the normal gaming state. It is possible for the player to understand that the number is 2,800. In addition, from "3,14,000" shown in the difference ball number image SD to the time when the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the difference between balls after the third first hit and before returning to the normal gaming state. It is possible for the player to understand that the number is 14,000. In addition, from "4,8500" shown in the difference ball number image SD to the time when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the difference ball difference from the 4th first hit until returning to the normal gaming state again. It is possible for the player to understand that the number is 8,500. In addition, from "5,15,000" shown in the difference ball number image SD to the time when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the difference ball difference after the 5th first hit and before returning to the normal gaming state. It is possible for the player to understand that the number is 15,000. In addition, from "6,3000" shown in the difference ball number image SD to the time when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the difference ball difference after the 6th first hit and before returning to the normal gaming state. It is possible for the player to understand that the number is 3000. In addition, from "7,3000" shown in the difference ball number image SD to the time when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the difference ball difference after the 7th first hit and before returning to the normal gaming state. It is possible for the player to understand that the number is 3000. In addition, from "8,7000" shown in the difference ball number image SD to the 8th first hit before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the difference ball difference until returning to the normal gaming state again. It is possible for the player to understand that the number is 7,000. In addition, from "9,14,000 balls" shown in the difference ball number image SD to the time when the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the jackpot game will be played after the 9th first hit and before returning to the normal gaming state. It is possible for the player to understand that the total number of game balls acquired is 14,000. Furthermore, from "10,700" shown in the difference ball number image SD to the time when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the difference ball difference from the 10th first hit until returning to the normal gaming state again. It is possible for the player to understand that the number is 750.

When the difference ball number image SD shown in FIG. 60(B) is displayed on the display screen 50a and a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the display of the difference ball number image SD shown in FIG. 60(B) ends. Thus, the total difference ball number image SS shown in FIG. 60(C) is displayed. In the total difference ball number image SS shown in FIG. 60(C), it is shown as "total of difference balls for each first hit: 80,000". The total number of difference balls image SS suggests the total number of difference balls from the 1st to 10th hits until the normal gaming state returns again before the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated. has been done. Since the total difference ball number image SS shown in FIG. 60(C) shows "80,000 total difference balls for each first jackpot", after the first win from the 1st to the 10th time, the normal game state is returned again. This makes it possible for the player to understand that the total number of difference balls until the game returns to 80,000.

When the total difference ball number image SS shown in FIG. 60(B) is displayed on the display screen 50a and a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the process proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 27(A).

<Operations and effects of the third modification>
In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the third modification, the game is stopped by the activation of the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function, so it is possible to provide the player with a pachinko game machine PY1 that does not award excessive prize balls. ing. However, the game may be stopped due to the activation of the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function, which may cause the player to feel dissatisfied. Therefore, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the difference number of balls for each first hit is determined by the difference ball number image SD displayed on the display screen 50a before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. It becomes possible to have the player confirm the information. Furthermore, according to the total difference ball number image SS displayed on the display screen 50a, by the time the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, after the first hit from the 1st to the 10th time, the normal gaming state returns again. It is also possible to check the total number of difference balls up to. By displaying the difference ball number image SD and the total difference ball number image SS on the display screen 50a, it becomes possible to give the player even a slight sense of accomplishment. Therefore, it is possible to have a positive influence on the player's next time and subsequent games at the pachinko game machine PY1 of the third modification.

<Fourth variation>
In the above embodiment, when the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the display screen 50a displays the game result image YZ (total shot number image SH, total won number image SN, total won number image SK, difference ball number reached image KN). ) is displayed. However, there is no need to be limited to this. In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the fourth modification, the game stop notification image YT is displayed on the display screen 50a, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. , an acquired ball icon video HG (see FIG. 61(B)) in which an acquired ball number icon image corresponding to the type of executed jackpot game (jackpot game X, jackpot game Y, jackpot game Z) is displayed is displayed on the display screen 50a. After that, the total number of pitches acquired image HH (see FIG. 61(C)) is displayed. In addition, the acquired ball number icon image includes a first acquired ball number icon image indicating 750, which is the number of prize balls that can be acquired in jackpot game X, and 600, which is the number of prize balls that can be acquired in jackpot game Y. A second acquired ball number icon image showing the number of prize balls that can be won in the jackpot game Z, a third acquired ball number icon image that shows 1500, which is the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game Z, and a third acquired ball number icon image that shows the number of prize balls for two times in the jackpot game Z. There is a fourth acquired pitch count icon image.

Next, based on FIG. 61, a moving image and a display image that are displayed on the display screen 50a when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the fourth modification will be described. In addition, in the third modification, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, a game stop notification image YT (Fig. 61 (A)) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), then the acquired ball icon video HG (see FIG. 61 (B)) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and then the total number of acquired balls is displayed. The image HH (see FIG. 61(C)) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and then the process proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 27(A).

In the fourth modification, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, first, a game stop notification image YT is displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 61(A). By displaying the game stop notification image YT on the display screen 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function has been activated.

When the game stop notification image YT shown in FIG. 61(A) is displayed on the display screen 50a and a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, the game stop notification image YT shown in FIG. 61(A) is displayed. The display switches to the acquired ball icon video HG shown in (B). In the acquired ball icon video HG shown in FIG. 61(B), the first acquired ball number icon image ("750") corresponding to the number of executions of jackpot game X until the over-prized ball abnormality prevention function is activated, ) is moved from the top to the bottom of the display screen 50a. In addition, in the acquired ball icon video HG shown in FIG. 61(B), the second acquired ball number icon image ("600", FIG. 61 (see (B)) is moved from the top to the bottom of the display screen 50a. Furthermore, in the acquired ball icon video HG shown in FIG. 61(B), a third acquired ball number icon image ("1500", (see FIG. 61(B)) is moved from the top to the bottom of the display screen 50a. While the acquired balls icon video HG is being displayed on the display screen 50a, the acquired pitches icon image is moved from the top to the bottom of the display screen 50a, and the acquired pitches icon images are piled up on the display screen 50a. become. In addition, by combining two third number of acquired balls icon images (“1500”, see FIG. 61(B)), it changes to a fourth number of acquired balls icon image indicating the number of prize balls for two rounds of jackpot game Z. do.

When the acquired ball icon video HG shown in FIG. 61(B) is displayed on the display screen 50a and a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the acquired ball icon video HG shown in FIG. 61(B) is displayed. The display switches to the total acquired pitches image HH shown in (C). The total number of pitches acquired image HH shown in FIG. A third acquired pitch count icon image and 25 fourth acquired pitch count icon images are displayed. The display screen 50a displays 10 first acquired pitch count icon images, 11 second acquired pitch count icon images, 3 third acquired pitch count icon images, and 25 fourth acquired pitch count icon images. By showing a state in which the numbers are stacked up, the sum of the numbers shown by all the acquired balls icon images is the number of jackpot games executed (jackpot game X, jackpot game It is possible for the player to understand that this is the total number of prize balls won in game Y and jackpot game Z). In addition, the total number of balls acquired image HH is the total number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot games executed (jackpot game X, jackpot game Y, jackpot game Z) before the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. It may also be a display image that suggests that.

When the total number of pitches acquired image HH shown in FIG. 61(C) is displayed on the display screen 50a and a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the process proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 27(A).

<Function and effect of the fourth modification>
In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the fourth modification, the game is stopped by the activation of the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function, so it is possible to provide the player with a pachinko game machine PY1 that does not award excessive prize balls. ing. However, the game may be stopped due to the activation of the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function, which may cause the player to feel dissatisfied. Therefore, when the over-awarded balls abnormality prevention function is activated, the number of acquired balls icon image is moved from the top to the bottom of the display screen 50a, and the total number of acquired balls indicating a state in which the number of acquired pitches icon images are piled up. Several images HH are displayed. As a result, the player is visually entertained by the acquired ball number icon image displayed on the display screen 50a, and the dissatisfaction caused by the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function being activated and the game being stopped is alleviated. is possible.

In the fourth modification, the player is made to know the number of balls acquired by the number of acquired balls icon images stacked and displayed on the display screen 50a. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, the number of acquired balls icon images piled up and displayed on the display screen 50a may allow the player to grasp the total number of prize balls acquired before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. . Further, the number of acquired ball number icon images stacked and displayed on the display screen 50a may be greater than the number of acquired ball number icon images actually acquired by the player. In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 121 determines the number of acquired pitch icon images to be piled up and displayed on the display screen 50a in accordance with the ratio of acquired pitch icon images acquired by the player. It's okay. In addition, if the total number of prize balls acquired before the over-place winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated is displayed on the display screen 50a, the rush state (consecutive winning balls) until the over-place winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated is displayed on the display screen 50a. The total number of prize balls acquired for each period may be displayed on the display screen 50a. Further, for example, in the pachinko game machine PY1 where the base is set to exceed "1", the number of prize balls won by winning the game ball into the general winning hole 10 may be displayed on the display screen 50a. . In addition, for example, a game ball image imitating game balls corresponding to the total number of prize balls acquired before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated may be displayed on the display screen 50a.

<Fifth modification example>
In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the above configuration, the game is stopped by the activation of the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function, so it is possible to provide the player with a pachinko gaming machine PY1 that does not award excessive prize balls. . However, in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine PY1, the result of the look-ahead determination is "jackpot", and the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls is 80,000 or more. Regardless of whether or not it was determined that this would occur, the configuration was such that the look-ahead effect could be executed based on the result of the look-ahead determination. However, the above embodiment has the following problems.

If a pre-reading effect is executed when there is a possibility that the over-prized ball abnormality prevention function is activated, and then the over-prized ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the contents of the pre-reading effect will not be reflected and the player may cause inconvenience. Specifically, for example, a rainbow-colored reservation icon (so-called premier performance) is executed in the reservation icon display area 50d as a pre-reading effect for the special map 1 reservation or the special map 2 reservation for which the special lottery has not been performed. If the special figure related random numbers (special figure 1 related random number, special figure 2 related random number) caused by the execution of the rainbow-colored pending icon are stored in the special figure pending storage unit 105 (special figure 1 pending storage unit 105a, Before the special drawing lottery result becomes a jackpot and the jackpot game is executed, the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is controlled to be impossible. If the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function had not been activated, there is a possibility that the prize ball that could have been won in the jackpot game may not be obtained.

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the fifth modification, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the pre-read determination is "jackpot" and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed is calculated based on the current difference ball number. If it is determined that the value added to the number information is 80000 or more, execution of the first pre-reading determination process (S3117) and the second pre-reading determining process (S3108) in the sensor detection process (S104) is prohibited. As a result, even if the sub-control board 120 receives the starting opening sensor command (the first starting opening sensor command, the second starting opening sensor command), the performance control microcomputer 121 does not execute the pre-read performance.

First, an icon preview change effect (suggestion effect) that can be executed in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the fifth modification will be explained. The icon preview change performance is a preview performance that suggests the degree of expectation of winning by changing the display mode of an icon (the pending icon HA or the icon TA). Note that the icon preview change effect may be executed as a pre-read effect based on the result of a pre-read determination, or may be executed as a preview effect based on the result of a special drawing lottery. Here, the display mode of the icon (the pending icon HA or the icon TA) will be explained. The display mode of the icon (the pending icon HA or the icon TA) has a white round shape as a default (basic) display mode. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, when the icon (the pending icon HA or the icon TA) is in the shape of a white circle, it suggests that the winning expectation is less than 1%, It doesn't really indicate the level of expectations for winning.

In addition to the default display mode, the icon (holding icon HA or the icon TA) can be displayed in two ways, including a display mode in which a "blue" character image is shown in a white circle shape, and a display mode in which a "blue" character image is shown in a white circle shape. A display mode with a "green" character image inside, a display mode with a "red" character image inside a white circle, and a "rainbow" character image inside a white circle. There is a display mode in which . In the fifth modification, as shown in FIG. 62, if the icon (the pending icon HA or the icon TA) has a display mode in which a "blue" character image is shown in a white circle shape, the winning This suggests that the expectation level is 3%. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 62, when the icon (the pending icon HA or the icon TA) is displayed in a white round shape and a "green" character image, the expectation of winning is 10%. It suggests something. As shown in FIG. 62, if the icon (pending icon HA or icon TA) is displayed in a white round shape and a "red" character image, the expectation of winning is 30%. It suggests. As shown in FIG. 62, if the icon (pending icon HA or icon TA) is displayed in a white round shape and a character image of "Rainbow", the expectation of winning is 100%. It suggests.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the fifth modification, the display mode of the icon (holding icon HA or the icon TA) is a white circle display mode ⇒ A character image of "blue" is shown inside the white circle shape. ⇒ Display mode in which a "green" character image is shown inside a white circle ⇒ Display mode in which a "red" character image is shown in a white circle ⇒ White circle It is suggested that the order in which the character image of "Rainbow" is shown in the shape indicates a higher probability of winning. In addition, if the icon (pending icon HA or the icon TA) is displayed in a white round shape with a character image of "Rainbow" displayed, the result of the special drawing lottery will be announced as a loss. This means that you are guaranteed to win the jackpot.

Next, based on FIG. 63, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the preread determination is "jackpot" and adds the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls. An icon preview change effect, which is a look-ahead effect that is executed when the value is determined to be less than 80,000, will be described. Further, in FIG. 63(A), the first display area 50d1, second display area 50d2, third display area 50d3, and fourth display area 50d4 of the reserved icon display area 50d and the icon display area 50e are displayed. However, some display areas are omitted in FIGS. 63(B) to 63(D).

As shown in FIG. 63(A), the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a ("5, 6, and 7"), and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed. It is definitely stopped and displayed ("5, 6, 7"). Note that, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the hold icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d. As a result, the player is informed that the special figure 2 pending number is "2". Further, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a.

Thereafter, the oldest special figure 2 related random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b is shifted by one to the first area, and the special figure 2 related random number in the first area is transferred to the special figure 2 reservation storage section. Cleared from 105b. Then, the special figure 2 lottery is held, and the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the result of the special figure 2 lottery is started. When execution of the special symbol variation effect is started, variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is started on the display screen 50a, and variable display of small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 is also started.

After that, before proceeding from the production example to the production example shown in FIG. 63(B), a game ball is entered into the second starting port 12 and displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d of the display screen 50a. A hold icon HA is displayed. As a result, the player is informed that the special figure 2 pending number is "2".

As shown in FIG. 63(B), the hold icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the hold icon display area 50d is moved to the icon display area 50e and displayed as the icon TA. Further, as shown in FIG. 63(B), the hold icon HA displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d is moved to the first display area 50d1 and displayed. In addition, as a new game ball enters the second starting port 12 and is newly stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, a new reservation icon is displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the reservation icon display area 50d. HA is displayed. As a result, the player is informed that the special figure 2 pending number is "2".

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(C), the hold icon HA displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d and the hold icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 are , an icon preview change effect, which is a look-ahead effect, is executed. When the icon preview change effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 63(C), the display mode of the pending icon HA displayed in the second display area 50d2 and the first display area 50d1 of the pending icon display area 50d changes. , the display mode changes to a display mode in which a character image of "change" is shown inside a white circle. In the icon preview change effect, the display mode of the pending icon HA is changed to a display mode in which a character image of "change" is shown in a white circle shape, giving the player an icon preview change effect that is a look-ahead effect. This makes it possible to know that the process has been executed.

After that, the process advances to FIG. 63(D). As shown in FIG. 63(D), the display mode of the hold icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the hold icon display area 50d is such that a character image of "red" is shown in a white circle shape. The display mode is changed to the one shown below. Further, as shown in FIG. 63(D), the display mode of the hold icon HA displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d is a white circle with a character image of "Rainbow" inside. The display mode is changed to the one shown. The display mode of the hold icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 is a "red" character image inside a white circle shape, so that it is understood that the jackpot expectation level is 30%, and to some extent It is possible to expect that it will be a jackpot. In addition, since the display form of the hold icon HA displayed in the second display area 50d2 is a character image of "Rainbow" inside a white circle shape, it is made to understand that winning the jackpot is confirmed. It is now possible.

Next, based on FIG. 64, the game control microcomputer 101 adds the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game that is to be executed, to the current number of difference balls, if the result of the pre-read determination is "jackpot". A case will be described in which when it is determined that the value is 80000 or more, execution of the pre-reading determination is prohibited and the icon preview change effect, which is the pre-reading effect, is not executed. Note that the result of the pre-reading determination for the pending icon HA displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the pending icon display area 50d shown in FIG. It is assumed that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls to the current number of differential balls is determined to be 80,000 or more. In addition, in FIG. 64(A), the first display area 50d1, second display area 50d2, third display area 50d3, and fourth display area 50d4 of the reserved icon display area 50d and the icon display area 50e are displayed. However, some display areas are omitted in FIGS. 64(B) to 64(D).

As shown in FIG. 64(A), the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a ("5, 6, and 7"), and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed. It is definitely stopped and displayed ("5, 6, 7"). Note that, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the hold icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d. As a result, the player is informed that the special figure 2 pending number is "2". Further, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a.

Thereafter, the oldest special figure 2 related random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b is shifted by one to the first area, and the special figure 2 related random number in the first area is transferred to the special figure 2 reservation storage section. Cleared from 105b. Then, the special figure 2 lottery is carried out, and the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the result of the special figure 2 lottery is started. When execution of the special symbol variation effect is started, variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is started on the display screen 50a, and variable display of small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 is also started.

After that, before proceeding to the production example shown in FIG. 64(B), a game ball is entered into the second starting port 12, and a pending icon HA is displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the pending icon display area 50d of the display screen 50a. is displayed. As a result, the player is informed that the special figure 2 pending number is "2".

When the execution of the special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 64(B), the pending icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the pending icon display area 50d moves to the icon display area 50e. and is displayed as the corresponding icon TA. Further, as shown in FIG. 64(B), the hold icon HA that was displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d is moved to the first display area 50d1, and is displayed in the hold icon display area 50d. The hold icon HA that was displayed in the third display area 50d3 is moved to and displayed in the second display area 50d2. As a result, the player is informed that the special figure 2 pending number is "2". In addition, the result of the pre-reading determination for the pending icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the pending icon display area 50d shown in FIG. 64(B) is "Jackpot", which can be obtained in the scheduled jackpot game. Since it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls to the current number of difference balls to the current number of difference balls is 80,000 or more, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the value shown in FIG. It is assumed that pre-reading determination for the hold icon HA displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d is prohibited.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64(C), the icon preview change effect, which is a prefetch effect, is performed only for the pending icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the pending icon display area 50d. When the icon preview change effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 64(C), the display mode of the pending icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the pending icon display area 50d changes to a white round shape. The display mode changes to a display mode in which a character image of "change" is shown inside. In addition, since the game control microcomputer 101 prohibits the pre-read judgment for the pending icon HA displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the pending icon display area 50d shown in FIG. 64(C), the icon preview change effect is executed. It will not be done.

After that, the process advances to FIG. 64(D). As shown in FIG. 64(D), the display mode of the hold icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the hold icon display area 50d is such that a character image of "red" is shown in a white circle shape. The display mode is changed to the one shown below. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 64(D), the display mode of the hold icon HA displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d remains as a white circle.

[Sensor Detection Process] As shown in FIG. 65, in the sensor detection process (S104) of the fifth modification, first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. It is determined whether or not (S3101). If the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S3101), a gate passing process (S3102) to be described later is performed. On the other hand, if the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S3101), the process passes the gate passing process (S3102) and proceeds to step S3103.

In the gate passing process (S3102), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is on standby for variation. Waiting for normal symbol fluctuation is a state in which neither normal symbol fluctuation display is being executed nor is an auxiliary game being executed. If the normal symbol is not on standby for variation, this process ends immediately, but if the normal symbol is on standby for variation, normal symbol random number acquisition processing is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process, a normal symbol random number (see FIG. 10(A)) is acquired, and the obtained random number value is stored in a predetermined storage area of the regular symbol reservation storage section 106 of the gaming RAM 104.

In step S3103, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 12, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a (S3103). If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 12 (NO in S3103), the process advances to step S3104, but if the game ball has entered the second starting port 12 (YES in S3103), the special drawing 2 It is determined whether the number of reserved balls (the number of second special symbols reserved, specifically the value of the counter provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of second special symbols reserved) has reached "4" (S3104 ). Then, if the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 has reached "4" (YES in S3104), the process ends, but if the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is less than "4" (NO in S3104), the process ends. ), add "1" to the number of reserved balls for special map 2 (S3105).

Subsequently, special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S3106) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S3106), the jackpot random number, symbol type random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number are acquired (that is, the random number group shown in FIG. 10(B) is acquired), and these acquired random numbers are It is stored in a storage area of the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b (FIG. 6) that corresponds to the current number of special figure 2 reservation balls.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the prefetch prohibition flag is ON (S3107). Here, in a state where the prefetch prohibition flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 101 does not perform the prefetch determination process (first prefetch determination process (S3117), second prefetch determination process (S3108)). On the other hand, in a state where the prefetch prohibition flag is OFF, the game control microcomputer 101 performs prefetch determination processing (first prefetch determination process (S3117), second prefetch determination process (S3108)).

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the prefetch prohibition flag is OFF in step S3107 (NO in S3107), it performs a second prefetch determination process (S3108). In the second look-ahead determination process (S3108), based on the random value group stored in step S3106, and using the look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A second starting port including a special drawing 2 pending number command representing the number of special drawing 2 related random numbers (special drawing 2 pending number) stored in the storage unit 105b and a second starting winning command representing the result of the second look-ahead determination. A sensor command is generated and the process advances to step S3110.

In addition, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the prefetch prohibition flag is ON in step S3107 (YES in S3107), the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure 2 related random number stored in the special figure 2 pending storage unit 105b. A command for the second starting port sensor including a special figure 2 pending number command representing the number (special figure 2 pending number) is generated (S3109), and the process proceeds to step S3112.

Next, in step S3110, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the second look-ahead determination process (S3108) is "jackpot" based on the current number of difference balls, and that the jackpot game corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol Z is played. It is determined whether the sum of the number of prize balls (1,500) that can be acquired is 80,000 or more (S3110). In step S3110, the game control microcomputer 101 determines based on the current difference number of balls that it is a "jackpot" based on the result of the second look-ahead determination process (S3108) and can be obtained in a jackpot game corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol Z. If it is determined that the sum of the number of prize balls (1,500) is 80,000 or more (YES in S3110), the prefetch prohibition flag is turned on (S3111), and the process proceeds to step S3112. In addition, in step S3110, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the current number of difference balls is a "jackpot" based on the result of the second look-ahead determination process (S3108), and that in the jackpot game corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol Z. If it is determined that the sum of the number of award balls (1,500) that can be obtained is less than 80,000 (NO in S3110), the process directly proceeds to step S3112.

Next, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets the second starting port sensor command generated in step S3108 or S3109 in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S3112), and proceeds to step S3113 shown in FIG. 66.

Subsequently, in the sensor detection process (S104), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether a game ball is detected by the sensor 11a (S3113). If no game ball has entered the first starting port 11 (NO in S3113), this process ends. In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 (YES in S3113), the number of special symbols 1 reserved balls (the number of first special symbols reserved, specifically, the number of reserved special symbols It is determined whether the value of the counter that counts the number of pending drawings has reached "4" (S3114). Then, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 has reached "4" (YES in S3114), this process ends, but if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is less than "4" (in S3114) NO), add "1" to the number of reserved balls for special map 1 (S3115).

Subsequently, special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S3116) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S3116), the jackpot random number, symbol type random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number are acquired (that is, the random number group shown in FIG. 10(B) is acquired), and these acquired random numbers are It is stored in a storage area of the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a (FIG. 6) that corresponds to the current number of special figure 1 reservation balls in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a (FIG. 6).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the prefetch prohibition flag is ON (S3117). Here, in a state where the prefetch prohibition flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 101 does not perform the prefetch determination process (first prefetch determination process (S3118), second prefetch determination process (S3108)). On the other hand, in a state where the prefetch prohibition flag is OFF, the game control microcomputer 101 performs prefetch determination processing (first prefetch determination process (S3118), second prefetch determination process (S3108)).

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the prefetch prohibition flag is OFF in step S3117 (NO in S3117), it performs the first prefetch determination process (S3118). In the first look-ahead determination process (S3118), based on the random value group stored in step S3116, using the look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A first starting opening including a special drawing 1 pending number command representing the number of special drawing 1 related random numbers (special drawing 1 pending number) stored in the storage unit 105a and a first starting winning command representing the result of the first look-ahead determination. A sensor command is generated and the process advances to step S3120.

In addition, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the prefetch prohibition flag is ON in step S3117 (YES in S3117), the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure 1 related random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. A command for the first starting port sensor including a special figure 1 pending number command representing the number (special figure 1 pending number) is generated (S3119), and the process proceeds to step S3122.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S3120 that the result of the first look-ahead determination process (S3118) is "jackpot" and the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X or jackpot symbol) It is determined whether the sum of the number of prize balls (750 or 600) that can be obtained in the jackpot game corresponding to Y) is 80,000 or more (S3120). In step S3120, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the first look-ahead determination process (S3118) is "jackpot" and the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X or jackpot symbol Y) based on the current number of difference balls in step S3120. If it is determined that the sum of the number of prize balls (750 or 600) that can be obtained in the corresponding jackpot game is 80,000 or more (YES in S3120), the prefetch prohibition flag is turned ON (S3121), Proceed to step S3122. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S3120 that the result of the first look-ahead determination process (S3118) is "jackpot" and the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X or jackpot symbol Y) ), if it is determined that the sum of the number of prize balls (750 or 600) that can be obtained in the jackpot game corresponding to the above is less than 80,000 (NO in S3120), the process directly advances to S3122. Note that step S3110, step S3120, and the game control microcomputer 101 correspond to the "predetermined determination means".

Next, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets the first starting port sensor command generated in step S3118 or S3119 to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S3122), and ends this process.

<Operations and effects of the fifth modification>
According to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the fifth modification, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the game is stopped, so it is possible to prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. . Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the fifth modification, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the look-ahead determination process (S3108, S3118) is a "jackpot" based on the current difference number of balls, and that the jackpot symbol is If it is determined that the sum of the number of prize balls (750, 600, or 1,500) that can be obtained in the jackpot game corresponding to the type is less than 80,000, a look-ahead effect is executed. Ru. On the other hand, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the look-ahead determination process (S3108, S3118) is a "jackpot" based on the current difference in the number of balls, and a prize that can be won in a jackpot game corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol is determined. If it is determined that the sum of the number of balls (750, 600, or 1,500) is 80,000 or more, the look-ahead effect is not executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately provide the player with an icon preview change effect, which is a look-ahead effect, based on the determination result as to whether or not the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the over-prized ball abnormality prevention function will be activated, the pre-reading effect will not be executed, so even if the over-prized ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the content of the pre-reading effect will not be reflected and the game will be played. This makes it possible to avoid any inconvenience caused to the person.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the fifth modification, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the look-ahead determination process (S3108, S3118) is a "jackpot" based on the current difference number of balls, and that the jackpot symbol is If it is determined that the sum of the number of prize balls (750, 600, or 1,500) that can be obtained in the jackpot game corresponding to the type is less than 80,000, a pre-reading determination process (first A first lookahead determination process (S3118) and a second lookahead determination process (S3108) may be performed. On the other hand, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the fifth modification, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the look-ahead determination process (S3108, S3118) is "jackpot" based on the current difference number of balls, and the jackpot symbol is If it is determined that the sum of the number of prize balls (750, 600, or 1,500) that can be obtained in the jackpot game corresponding to the type is 80,000 or more, a look-ahead determination process ( The first read-ahead determination process (S3118) and the second read-ahead determination process (S3108) are not performed. As a result, if the result of the look-ahead determination process (S3108, S3118) is "jackpot" and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol (750, 600 or 1,500) is 80,000 or more. ) is performed, it becomes possible to appropriately provide the player with an icon preview change effect, which is a look-ahead effect.

<Sixth variation>
In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the fifth modification example, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the current difference number of balls, the result of the look-ahead determination process (S3108, S3118) is "jackpot", and the type of jackpot symbol. It is determined whether the sum of the number of prize balls (750, 600, or 1500) that can be obtained in the corresponding jackpot game is 80,000 or more (S3110, S3120), and an affirmative determination is made. (YES in S3110, YES in S3120), the prefetching prohibition flag is turned ON, and the first prefetching determination process (S3118) and second prefetching determination process (S3108) are not executed, so the prefetching effect is not executed. The configuration was such that it was not executed. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, in the sixth modification, the game control microcomputer 101 adds the current number of difference balls to the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game (750 balls, 600 or 1,500) is equal to or greater than 80,000, and as a result of the affirmative determination, the prefetch prohibition flag is turned ON, and the first prefetch determination process is performed. (S3118) and the second prefetch determination process (S3108) may not be executed, and the configuration may be such that the prefetch effect is not executed.

Next, based on FIG. 67, the game control microcomputer 101 adds the number of prize balls (750 balls) that can be won in the jackpot game corresponding to the result of jackpot symbol type random number determination (S1506) to the current difference ball number. , 600, or 1,500) is determined to be less than 80,000, an icon preview change effect that is a look-ahead effect that is executed will be described. Further, in FIG. 67(A), the first display area 50d1, second display area 50d2, third display area 50d3, and fourth display area 50d4 of the reserved icon display area 50d and the icon display area 50e are displayed. However, some display areas are omitted in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(E).

As shown in FIG. 67(A), the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a ("5, 6, and 7"), and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed. It is definitely stopped and displayed ("5, 6, 7"). Note that, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the hold icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the hold icon display area 50d. As a result, the player is informed that the special figure 2 pending number is "1". Further, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a.

Thereafter, the oldest special figure 2 related random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b is shifted by one to the first area side, and the special figure 2 related random number in the first area is transferred to the special figure 2 reservation storage section. Cleared from 105b. Then, the special figure 2 lottery is held, and the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the result of the special figure 2 lottery is started. When the execution of the special symbol variation effect is started, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is started on the display screen 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 is also started.

When the execution of the special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the pending icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the pending icon display area 50d moves to the icon display area 50e. and is displayed as the corresponding icon TA.

After that, before proceeding from the production example shown in FIG. 67(B) to the production example shown in FIG. 67(C), a game ball is entered into the second starting port 12, and the hold icon display area 50d of the display screen 50a A hold icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1. As a result, the player is informed that the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "1".

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(C), an icon preview change effect, which is a pre-read effect, is performed for the pending icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1. When the icon preview change effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 67(C), the display mode of the pending icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the pending icon display area 50d changes to a white round shape. The display mode is changed to a display mode in which a character image of "change" is shown. In the icon preview change effect, the display mode of the pending icon HA is changed to a display mode in which a character image of "change" is shown in a white circle shape, giving the player an icon preview change effect that is a look-ahead effect. This makes it possible to know that the process has been executed.

After that, the process advances to FIG. 67(D). As shown in FIG. 67(D), the display mode of the hold icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the hold icon display area 50d is such that a character image of "Rainbow" is shown in a white circle shape. The display mode is changed to the one shown below. In addition, since the display form of the hold icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 is a character image of "Rainbow" inside a white circle, it is made to understand that winning the jackpot is confirmed. It is now possible.

When the execution of the special symbol variation effect is completed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a in a manner indicating a jackpot ("5, 5, 5"), and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 are also definitely stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot ("5.5.5").

Next, based on FIG. 68, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the current difference number of balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol type random number determination result (S1506). A case will be described in which it is determined that the sum of the number of prize balls (750, 600, or 1,500) is 80,000 or more and the look-ahead effect is not executed. Further, in FIG. 68(A), the first display area 50d1, second display area 50d2, third display area 50d3, and fourth display area 50d4 of the reserved icon display area 50d and the icon display area 50e are displayed. However, some display areas are omitted in FIGS. 68(B) to 68(E).

As shown in FIG. 68(A), the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a ("5, 6, and 7"), and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed. It is definitely stopped and displayed ("5, 6, 7"). Note that, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the hold icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d. As a result, the player is informed that the special figure 2 pending number is "2". Further, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a.

Thereafter, the oldest special figure 2 related random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b is shifted by one to the first area side, and the special figure 2 related random number in the first area is transferred to the special figure 2 reservation storage section. Cleared from 105b. Then, the special figure 2 lottery is carried out, and the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the result of the special figure 2 lottery is started. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game to be executed (750, 600, or 1,500) is determined to be 80,000 or more, and the prefetch prohibition flag is turned ON.

When the execution of the special symbol variation effect is started, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is started on the display screen 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 is also started.

When the execution of the special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the pending icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the pending icon display area 50d moves to the corresponding icon display area 50e. and is displayed as the corresponding icon TA.

After that, before proceeding from the production example shown in FIG. 68(B) to the production example shown in FIG. 68(C), a game ball is entered into the second starting port 12, and the hold icon display area 50d of the display screen 50a A hold icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1. As a result, the player is informed that the special figure 2 pending number is "1".

The game control microcomputer 101 determines the number of prize balls (750, 600, or 1500) that can be won in the jackpot game corresponding to the result of jackpot symbol type random number determination (S1506), based on the current number of difference balls. ) is determined to be 80000 or more, the first prefetching determination process (S3118) and the second prefetching determination process (S3108) are not executed, and the prefetching effect is not executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 68(C), the icon preview change effect, which is a pre-read effect, is not performed for the pending icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1. As a result, as shown in FIG. 68(C), the display mode of the hold icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the hold icon display area 50d of the display screen 50a is changed to the default (basic) display mode (white). (round shape).

After that, the process advances to FIG. 68(D). As shown in FIG. 68(D), the display mode of the hold icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the hold icon display area 50d of the display screen 50a is the default (basic) display mode (white round shape). ) remains the same.

When the execution of the special symbol fluctuation effect is completed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a in a manner indicating a jackpot ("5, 5, 5"), and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 are also definitely stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot ("5.5.5").

Next, the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (special figure 1 jackpot determination process) of the sixth modification will be explained using FIG. 69.

[Special figure 2 jackpot determination process (special figure 1 jackpot determination process)] The special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) and the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) of the sixth modification have the same processing flow. Therefore, a summary description will be given based on FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. 69, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) or the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), first, a special symbol random number (jackpot random number) is read out as a determination value (S1501). Specifically, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402), it is stored in the first storage area of the special figure 2 pending storage section 105b of the gaming RAM 104 (that is, the storage area corresponding to the first of the second reserved special figure). Read out the special symbol random number. In addition, in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), the value is stored in the first storage area of the special figure 1 pending storage section 105a of the gaming RAM 104 (that is, the storage area corresponding to the first of the first special figure pending). Read out the special pattern random number.

Next, a jackpot determination table (FIG. 12(A)) is set (S1502). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON, that is, whether or not the state is high probability (S1503). If it is not in a high probability state (NO in S1503), that is, if it is in a normal probability state (non-high probability state), the table for the normal probability state (jackpot judgment value is "1000" to "1219"), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot (S1504). On the other hand, if it is in a high probability state (YES in S1503), it is determined whether it is a jackpot based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "1000" to "2499") among the jackpot judgment tables (Fig. 12 (A)). It is determined whether or not (S1505).

If the result of the jackpot determination (S1504, S1505) is "jackpot", the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 12(B) (S1506). After determining the jackpot type (S1506), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1507), and based on the current difference number of balls and the jackpot symbol type random number judgment result (S1506), it is possible to win in the jackpot game to be executed. It is determined whether the sum of the number of prize balls (750, 600, or 1,500) is 80,000 or more (S1509). Note that step S1509 and the game control microcomputer 101 correspond to the "predetermined determination means".

In step S1509, the game control microcomputer 101 adds the number of prize balls (750, 600, or 1500) that can be won in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol type random number determination result (S1506) to the current difference ball number. If it is determined that the added value is 80,000 or more (YES in S1509), the prefetch prohibition flag is turned ON (S1510), and the process advances to step S1508. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game to be executed (750 balls, 600 or 1,500) is less than 80,000 (NO in S1509), the process directly advances to step S1508.

In step S1508, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure stop symbol data corresponding to the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S1508) and ends the process. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination (S1504, S1505) is "lose", special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set (S1508) and the process ends.

<Operations and effects of the sixth modification>
According to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the sixth modification, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the game is stopped, so it is possible to prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. . In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 adds the number of prize balls (750, 600, or 1500) that can be won in the jackpot game corresponding to the result of jackpot symbol type random number determination (S1506) to the current difference ball number. ) is 80000 or more (S1509), and as a result of the affirmative determination (YES in S1509), the read-ahead prohibition flag is turned ON, and the first read-ahead is activated. The determination process (S3118) and the second prefetch determination process (S3108) are not executed. As a result, even if the performance control microcomputer 121 receives the starting opening sensor command (first starting opening sensor command, second starting opening sensor command), the pre-reading performance is not executed. As a result, if there is a possibility that the over-prized ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the pre-reading effect will not be executed, so even if the over-prized ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the contents of the pre-reading effect will not be reflected. It is possible to avoid inconvenience for the player.

<Seventh modification example>
In the pachinko gaming machines PY1 of the fifth modification example and the sixth modification example, the game control microcomputer 101 adds the number of prize balls that can be won in the jackpot game to the current difference number of balls (750 balls, 600 balls). , or 1,500) is 80,000 or more. However, there is no need to be limited to this. In the seventh modification, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the sum of the current number of differential balls and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game (either 750, 600, or 1,500) is 80,000 or more. It is not determined whether the In the seventh modification, in the start winning process (S4302), the performance control microcomputer 121 changes the current difference number of balls to the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game (750, 600). or 1,500) is determined to be 80,000 or more. The starting winning process (S4302) of the seventh modification will be explained using FIG. 70.

[Start-up winning process] First, in the starting-winning process (S4302) of the seventh modification, as shown in FIG. , second starting port sensor command) is analyzed (S4401).

After step S4401, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines the number of prize balls (750, 600, or 1500) that can be won in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed based on the result analyzed in step S4401. It is determined whether the value added to the current difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage unit 124c becomes 80000 or more (S4408). Note that step S4408 and the performance control microcomputer 121 correspond to the "predetermined determination means".

In step S4408, the performance control microcomputer 121 calculates the sum of the current number of difference balls and the number of prize balls (750, 600, or 1500) that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed. If it is determined that it is less than 80,000 (NO in S4408), it is determined whether or not to execute a prefetch effect (S4409). In addition, in step S4408, the production control microcomputer 121 adds the current number of difference balls and the number of prize balls (750, 600, or 1500) that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed. If it is determined that the value is 80,000 or more (YES in S4408), the process is immediately terminated.

In step S4409, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute a prefetch effect (YES in S4409), and sets a prefetch start command to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S4407). Further, in step S4409, if it is determined that the prefetch effect is not to be executed (NO in S4409), this process is ended as is.

<Operations and effects of the seventh modification>
According to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the seventh modification, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the game is stopped, so it is possible to prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. . In addition, in the start winning process (S4302), the performance control microcomputer 121 executes the execution based on the analysis result of the start term sensor command based on the current difference number of balls recorded in the performance difference ball number storage unit 124c. It was determined whether the sum of the number of prize balls (750, 600, or 1,500) that can be obtained in the planned jackpot game is 80,000 or more (S4409). When the microcomputer 121 for performance control and the determination result in step S4409 is 80,000 or more, the pre-read performance is not executed, and when it is less than 80,000, the pre-read performance is executed. As a result, in the seventh modification, the game control microcomputer 101 adds the number of prize balls (750, 600, or 1500) that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls. Since the configuration does not include the process of determining whether or not the value obtained is 80,000 or more, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 101 is avoided, and the performance control microcomputer 121 performs the determination in step S4409. Depending on the result, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the over-prized ball abnormality prevention function will be activated, the pre-reading effect will not be executed, so even if the over-prized ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the content of the pre-reading effect will not be reflected and the game will be played. This makes it possible to avoid any inconvenience caused to the person.

In the pachinko gaming machines PY1 of the fifth to seventh variations, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed is the current difference number of balls (either 750 balls, 600 balls, or 1500 balls). ) is configured to determine whether the added value is 80,000 or more, so the player is informed that the maximum number of balls won in the jackpot game will not be obtained because the look-ahead effect is not executed. There is a possibility that you will be able to understand it. Therefore, regardless of whether the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed is 750, 600, or 1500, the maximum number of prize balls that can be obtained (1500 ) may be configured to determine whether the added value is 80,000 or more. This makes it possible to prevent the player from understanding that the maximum number of balls won and put out in the jackpot game will not be obtained because the look-ahead effect is not executed.

<Eighth modification example>
The above embodiment is configured as a pachinko game machine (type 1 game machine) in which a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) is executed when a jackpot is won in a special drawing lottery. On the other hand, in the eighth modification, it is configured as a so-called 1 type 2 type mixer. That is, when a small win is won in the special drawing lottery, a small win game is executed in which the second large prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds. In this case, when the game ball that enters the second big winning hole 15 due to the execution of the small winning game passes through the specific area 16 of the second big winning hole 15, the big winning game (type 2 big winning game) is executed. In this manner, in the eighth modification, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing lottery, a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second jackpot 15, a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) is executed. The machine is configured as a gaming machine (mixing machine of 1 type and 2 types) in which a type jackpot game is executed.

Here, the jackpot game is executed by operating the accessory continuous operating device in accordance with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is a device that becomes a condition for operating the accessory continuous operation device. The condition device is set when a jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed as a special symbol, or when the accessory continuous operation device is not activated (in the 8th variation, when a small win symbol is confirmed and displayed as a special symbol and executed Activated when the game ball passes through a specific area (in the 8th modification, the specific area 16) in the big winning opening (in the 8th modification, the 2nd big winning opening 15) in the small winning game). Become. Further, the accessory continuous operation device is a device for shifting to a jackpot game state in which the jackpot is operated continuously.

In the above embodiment, when a small win is won as a result of the special drawing lottery, a small win game in which the second large prize opening 15 is opened is not executed. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the above embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a provided in the second big winning hole 15, the game control microcomputer 101 activates the second big winning hole. The number of game balls entering into the second prize opening 15 was counted, the total number of prize balls was added, and prize balls corresponding to the second grand prize opening 15 were awarded. However, if the 1st and 2nd type mixer is equipped with a function to prevent excessive prize balls from occurring, the following problems may occur.

If the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 during a small winning game, that is, when the condition device is not activated, it is possible to activate the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function at the timing when the execution of the small winning game ends. In this case, even if the game ball that enters the second large prize opening 15 passes through the specific area 16 after the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 during the small winning game, the execution of the small winning game ends. At this timing, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function was activated, and although the game ball passed through the specific area 16, the condition device was not activated, so the accessory continuous activation device was not activated, and the game was played in one round of 2 types of jackpot games. There is a risk that a situation may arise in which the person cannot obtain the product.

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the eighth modification, the number of game balls entering the second big winning hole 15 is counted by the second big winning hole sensor 15a provided in the second big winning hole 15. However, the total number of prize balls and the difference number of balls are not added, and the prize balls corresponding to the second grand prize opening 15 are not paid out from the prize ball payout device 73. In addition, when a game ball is detected by either the specific area sensor 16a or the non-specific area sensor 17a in the second big prize opening 15, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the difference between the total number of winning balls and the non-specific area sensor 17a. The number of balls is added up, and the prize balls corresponding to the second big prize opening 15 are paid out from the prize ball payout device 73.

According to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the eighth modification having the above-described configuration, when the difference in the number of balls reaches, for example, 79985 in the middle of a small winning game, the game balls that enter the second big prize opening 15 are Even if it is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a, the total number of winning balls and the difference number of balls are not increased, and the prize balls (for example, 15 balls) corresponding to the second big winning hole 15 are sent from the prize ball payout device 73. Not paid out. After that, the game balls detected by the second big prize opening sensor 15a are detected by the specific area sensor 16a, and the total prize balls reach 80,000, and the prize balls corresponding to the second big prize opening 15 (for example, 15 ) is paid out, the condition device is activated when it is detected by the specific area sensor 16a, and the state is shifted to the jackpot game state, so the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is not activated until the jackpot game state ends. . Thereby, the above-mentioned problems can be solved.

Next, based on FIG. 71, regarding the relationship between the constant operation of the distribution member 16k of the eighth modification and the opening pattern of the second big prize opening 15 (VAT opening/closing member 15k) in the small winning game of the eighth modification. explain. In the eighth modification, there is an opening pattern shown in FIG. 71(b) as an opening pattern of the second big winning hole 15 in the small winning game. In addition, FIG. 71(a) shows the timing of the variable display and stop display of the special symbols in order to make it easier to understand the timing of the start of the small winning game.

The release pattern shown in FIG. 71(b) is the release pattern selected when a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery. In other words, this is an opening pattern that is selected when "small winning symbol a" (see FIG. 72), which will be described later, is won. This opening pattern is a passage opening pattern that allows passage to the specific area 16.

More specifically, this passage opening pattern is an opening in which the second big prize opening 15 is closed for 8 ms, then opened for 1600 ms, and then closed for 6000 ms. It's a pattern. In other words, the small winning game executed with this opening pattern includes an opening in which the second big winning hole 15 is closed for 8 ms, a small winning opening game in which the second big winning hole 15 is opened for 1600 ms, and a small winning opening game in which the second big winning hole 15 is opened for 6000 ms. It includes a post-closure interval in which the second big prize opening 15 is closed.

When the second grand prize opening 15 is opened in such an opening pattern, the distribution member 16k is opened, the distribution member 16k is in a state allowing passage (see FIGS. 71(b) and 71(c)). Therefore, no matter what winning timing a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 15, the game ball can pass through the specific area 16. In addition, in this embodiment, if the game ball is continuously fired by right-handed hitting, the game ball will definitely enter the second prize winning hole 15 during the opening period of 1.6 seconds. Various devices such as a winning device 15D are arranged. Further, the time required for the game ball passing through the second big prize opening 15 to reach the placement position of the distribution member 16k is shorter than 3000 ms. In other words, in this embodiment, a small win essentially functions as a jackpot. Note that in this specification, a small win based on the special drawing 2 lottery may be referred to as a special 2V passing small win.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the small winning game, the number of game balls that have entered the second big winning device 15D is counted based on the detection by the second big winning opening sensor 15a, and the second big winning device The number of game balls discharged outside 15D is counted based on detection by specific area sensor 16a or non-specific area sensor 17a. That is, in this embodiment, the specific area sensor 16a and the non-specific area sensor 17a also function as a discharge port sensor that counts the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the second big prize winning device 15D. Then, when the two count values do not match at the end of the constant operation of the distribution member 16k, an error notification is performed. In addition, after the second big prize opening 15 is closed, the operation of the distribution member 16k may be stopped when both count values match. In this way, it becomes possible to smoothly start the variable display of the special symbols after the second big prize opening 15 is closed.

Next, types of jackpots and types of small wins in the eighth modification will be explained in detail based on FIG. 72. In the eighth modification, the results of the special drawing lottery (special drawing 1 drawing and special drawing 2 drawing) include "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". At the time of a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 81. The jackpot symbols include "jackpot symbol A" and "jackpot symbol B." In addition, in the case of a "small win", the "small win symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 81. The small winning pattern includes a "small winning pattern a". At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 81.

When a jackpot is won in the special drawing lottery, a "jackpot game" is executed in which the first jackpot 14 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. When a small win is won, a "small win game" is executed in which the second large winning hole 15 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed. When a game ball enters the specific area 16 in the second big winning hole 15 during execution of a small winning game, the first big winning hole 14 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of small winning symbol that has been won. A "jackpot game" to open the game is executed. A jackpot game executed based on the result of the special drawing drawing being a jackpot win is called a type 1 jackpot game, and a jackpot game executed based on passing to a specific area 16 is called a type 2 jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the small winning game includes a small winning opening game in which the second large winning opening 15 is opened, an opening (pre-opening interval) before the small winning opening game starts, and a small winning opening game when the small winning opening game ends. It includes a later ending (post-closure interval).

As a result of the special drawing lottery, when a jackpot is won (that is, when a first-class jackpot is won), a jackpot game (first-class jackpot game) for opening the first jackpot 14 is executed. In the eighth modification, there is one type of jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display 81a) that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol There is one type of jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 2 display 81b) that can be won in the (special symbol 2) lottery. Specifically, in the special drawing 1 drawing, there is a possibility of winning the "jackpot symbol A", and in the special drawing 2 drawing, there is a possibility of winning the "jackpot symbol B".

As shown in FIG. 8, "Jackpot symbol A" is a 4R (round) jackpot, and the number of openings of the first jackpot 14 per 1R is one, and the maximum opening time is 29.5 seconds. be. When the "jackpot symbol A" is won, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a low probability high base gaming state in which the number of time reductions is one.

Moreover, "jackpot symbol B" is a 10R jackpot, and the number of openings of the first jackpot 14 per 1R is one, and the maximum opening time is 29.5 seconds. When the "jackpot symbol B" is won, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a low probability high base gaming state in which the number of time reductions is 6 times.

Furthermore, if a small win is won as a result of the special drawing lottery, a small win game is executed in which the second large winning hole 15 is opened once. When a game ball enters the second big prize opening 15 opened by a small winning game and the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second big winning opening 15, it becomes a jackpot win and the first prize is won continuously. A jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) that opens the jackpot 14 is executed. When this jackpot game (a jackpot game triggered by passage to the specific area 16) is executed, the opening of the second big winning opening 15 as a small winning game corresponds to the 1R. In addition, if the game ball does not pass to the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the jackpot game will not be executed. In this specification, a jackpot game or a small win game may be referred to as a special game. In addition, in the special game, there may be a round in which the grand prize opening is opened multiple times in one round.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, there is only one type of small winning pattern that can be won in the special drawing 2 lottery (the small winning pattern that is stopped and displayed on the special drawing 2 display 81b). Specifically, in the special drawing 2 lottery, there is a possibility of winning the "small winning pattern a". Further, there may be two or more types of small winning symbols (small winning symbols stopped and displayed on the special symbol 2 display 81b) that can be won in the special symbol 2 lottery. In this case, for example, in the special drawing 2 lottery, the "small winning symbol c" may be won. In the special drawing 2 lottery, if you win the "small winning pattern c", it is very difficult for the game ball that entered the second large prize opening 15 in the small winning game to pass through the specific area 16, It may be very difficult to execute a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) in which the first jackpot 14 is opened continuously without winning the jackpot.

"Small winning symbol a" is a small winning that always allows passage to the specific area 16 (also referred to as V passage) as long as the game is played correctly. In other words, in this embodiment, a small winning based on the special drawing 2 lottery has substantially the same meaning as a jackpot winning.

In the small winning game based on each type of small winning symbols, the second large prize opening 15 is opened once for 1.6 seconds. Further, the opening time in each small winning game is 0.008 seconds. In addition, in a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) executed based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16, even in a type 2 jackpot game based on "small winning pattern a", 1R per 1R from 2R to 10R. times, the first big prize opening 14 is opened with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds. In other words, a 9R type 2 jackpot game is essentially executed. The gaming state after the execution of this type 2 jackpot game is controlled to be a low probability high base gaming state with 6 time saving times.

In addition, in the 8th modification, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in the special drawing 1 lottery based on winning in the first starting opening 11 and the special drawing 2 drawing based on winning in the second starting opening 12. , the probability of winning a small win is different. In the special drawing 1 drawing, the probability of winning a small hit is zero, and in the special drawing 2 drawing, the probability of winning a small winning is about 1/7. In other words, it can be said that it is easier to win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery than in the special drawing 1 drawing. Note that the special drawing 1 lottery may also be configured to allow a small win to be won. In this case, it is desirable that the small winning probability in the special drawing 1 drawing is set lower than the small winning winning probability in the special drawing 2 drawing.

Next, the flow of the game progress in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the eighth modification will be explained based on FIG. 73. As shown in FIG. 73, first, in the low-probability, low-base game state, the game is played by left-handed hitting and the player aims to win a jackpot based on the special drawing 1 lottery.

If you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery, if the type of jackpot symbol is "jackpot symbol A", after the 4R jackpot game, you will move to a low probability high base game state where the number of time savings is 1 (Fig. 72).

In the low-probability, high-base game state, the game is played by right-handed hitting, and the player aims to win a jackpot based on the special drawing 2 lottery (mainly a jackpot based on passing through the specific area 16 after winning a small win). In the low probability high base gaming state where the number of time reductions is set to 1, the total number of time reductions "1" and the upper limit memory number of special drawing 2 pending "4" (i.e. 5 times), special drawing 2 lottery It becomes possible to receive. In other words, after entering the low probability high base gaming state, causing a winning to the second starting opening 12, and starting the first special drawing 2 lottery and the variable display of the special drawing 2, this variable display of the special drawing 2 By storing 4 Tokuzu 2 Pending in it, even after the low probability high base gaming state ends and returning to the low probability low base gaming state, you can maximize the Tokuzu 2 lottery based on the Tokuzu 2 pending. You can take it 4 times.

In the special drawing 2 lottery, if you win a type 2 jackpot after winning a small hit, if the type of small winning symbol is "small winning symbol a", after the jackpot game of 9R, the time saving number is 6 times low. Transition to the high probability base gaming state (see FIG. 72). If a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the small winning symbol a will be selected 100% of the time. In addition, in the special drawing 2 lottery, if you win a direct jackpot (if you win "jackpot symbol B"), after the 10R jackpot game, you will move to a low probability high base game state with a time saving number of 6 times. .

In addition, if the number of time reductions is set to 6 times, the total number of time reductions "6" and the upper limit memory number of special drawing 2 pending "4" (i.e. 10 times), you will receive the special drawing 2 lottery. becomes possible. In the eighth modification, the probability of winning a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery is approximately 1/7. Therefore, it is easier to execute the next jackpot game when the player shifts to a low probability high base gaming state where the number of time savings is 6 times than when the player shifts to a low probability high base gaming state where the number of time savings is 1 time ( It can be said that it is easy to do so-called consecutive residences. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the eighth modification is configured so that when a small hit is won based on the special drawing 2 lottery, a jackpot game will always be executed as long as the game is played correctly. There is. Therefore, it can be said that the actual probability of winning the jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery is approximately 1/7.

As long as small wins or direct jackpots continue to be won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the advantageous state for the player (state in which it is easy to win a jackpot), which is mainly based on the special drawing 2 drawing, continues. If the low-probability high-base gaming state ends and returns to the low-probability low-base gaming state, and all the remaining special drawings 2 pending at that time (remaining special drawings 2 pending) are also losses, the special drawings will be played again. The game will return to one based on one lottery.

Next, the timing at which the excessive prize ball prevention function of the eighth modification is activated will be explained based on FIG. 74. The over-winning ball prevention function basically operates on the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more (predetermined condition). That is, in the eighth modification, basically, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated at the timing when the difference number of balls reaches 80,000.

However, in the eighth modification, even if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more, if the type 1 jackpot game is in progress, that is, if the accessory continuous operation device is activated, the type 1 jackpot game will not be executed. On the condition that the execution is completed (predetermined condition), the excessive prize ball prevention function will be activated. In other words, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate at the timing when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 during the execution of the type 1 jackpot game, and the over-prize ball prevention function operates at the timing when the execution of the type 1 jackpot game ends. become. In addition, in the eighth modification, even if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more, if a small winning game is being executed, an overpayment is made on the condition that the execution of the small winning game is completed (predetermined condition). The prize ball prevention function will be activated. In other words, the excessive prize ball prevention function will not operate at the timing when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 during the execution of the small winning game, and the excessive prize ball prevention function will operate at the timing when the execution of the small winning game ends. . Furthermore, in the eighth modification, even if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more, if the ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second big prize opening 15 during the execution of a small winning game (specific area sensor 16a), the accessory continuous operating device is activated by the operation of the condition device, and the state is shifted to a type 2 jackpot game state in which the first jackpot 14 is operated continuously. Therefore, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated on the condition that the execution of the type 2 jackpot game is completed (predetermined condition). In other words, even if the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate during the execution of the Type 2 jackpot game, and the over-prize ball prevention function operates at the timing when the execution of the Type 2 jackpot game ends. It turns out.

For example, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 74(A). Of course, at this time, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Next, as shown in FIG. 74(A), it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 when the player is in the middle of the low-accuracy-high base state. At this time, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. In this manner, in this embodiment, the game is stopped in the middle of the low probability high base state, and it is possible to end the game in the middle of the low probability high base state.

On the other hand, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 74(B), for example. Of course, at this time, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 when the player is in the middle of the type 1 jackpot game state. At this time, the excessive prize ball prevention function does not operate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74(B), when the first type jackpot game state ends, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. In this way, in this embodiment, the game does not stop during the first type jackpot game state, and the player can end the game at a convenient timing when the first type jackpot game state ends.

Further, for example, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 74(C). Of course, at this time, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function does not operate. Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of a small winning game. At this time, the excessive prize ball prevention function does not operate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74(C), when the small winning game ends, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. In this way, in this embodiment, the game does not stop during the small winning game, and it is possible for the player to end the game at a convenient timing when the small winning game ends.

Further, for example, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 74(D). Of course, at this time, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), even if the difference number of balls reaches 80,000 because it is detected by the specific area sensor 16a during the small winning game, it is detected by the specific area sensor 16a. Since the conditional device is activated and the state is shifted to the second type jackpot game state, the excessive prize ball prevention function is not activated. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74(D), when the second type jackpot game state ends, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. In this way, in this embodiment, the game does not stop during the small winning game and the 2nd type jackpot game state, and it is possible for the player to end the game at a convenient timing when the 2nd type jackpot game state ends. It is.

[Input processing] As shown in FIG. 75, in the input processing (S102) of the eighth modification, first, a signal based on whether the special reset switch 181 is ON or not, that is, a signal based on a pressing operation on the special reset switch 181 is received. It is determined whether or not (S201). If it is not ON (NO in S201), the process advances to step S204. On the other hand, if it is ON (YES in S201), non-erasing clear processing is executed (S202). In the non-erasing clearing process (S202), information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and number of difference balls. The information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the storage unit 107c is cleared.

Following step S202, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S203), and the process proceeds to step S205. In this way, when the non-erasing clear command is transmitted to the production control board 120, as shown in FIG. 30(A), the difference ball number reset notification image CLS is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 50a.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a detection signal from the specific area sensor 16a or the non-specific area sensor 17a. In step S205, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it has received a detection signal from the specific area sensor 16a or the non-specific area sensor 17a (YES in S205), A second grand prize opening prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls according to winnings is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S206), and the process proceeds to step S204. This second large winning opening prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 170 by output processing (S106). When the payout control board 170 receives the second large winning hole prize ball command, the prize ball payout device 73 will pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the type of winning hole. In addition, in step S205, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it has not received a detection signal from the specific area sensor 16a or the non-specific area sensor 17a (NO in S205), the game control microcomputer 101 directly proceeds to step S204. move on.

In step S204, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processes and ends this process. In other processing (S204), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in, for example, a detection signal from a lower tray full switch that detects whether the lower tray 35 is full, and stores it in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 as lower tray full data. . In addition, in other processing (S204), the game control microcomputer 101 controls the winning hole sensors (first starting hole sensor 11a, second starting hole sensor, first big winning hole sensor 14a, second big winning hole sensor 15a, In response to the detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 10a), a prize ball command for paying out the number of prize balls according to the type of winning hole is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. This prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 170 through output processing (S106) to be described later, and the prize ball payout device 73 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the type of winning hole.

[Difference number of balls measurement processing] In the difference number of balls measurement processing (S106) of the eighth modification, first, the game control microcomputer 101 performs detection by the first starting port sensor 11a, detection by the second starting port sensor 12a, and detection by the specific area. Based on the detection by the sensor 16a and the detection by the non-specific area sensor 17a, a total prize ball counting process is executed to count the total number of prize balls paid out to the player (S301). Information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the total number of prize balls storage section 107a (see FIG. 6). Note that a total prize ball number command including information on the counted total prize ball number is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Next, a total number of fired balls counting process is executed to count the total number of fired balls based on the detection by the discharge port sensor (S302). Information on the counted total number of fired balls is stored in the total number of fired balls storage section 107b (see FIG. 6). Incidentally, a total prize ball number command including information on the total number of fired balls counted is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Then, the difference ball number calculation process is executed to calculate the difference number of balls by subtracting the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls (S303). Information on the calculated difference number of balls is stored in the difference number storage unit 107c (see FIG. 6). Note that a difference ball number command including information on the counted difference ball number is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

<Operations and effects of the 8th modification>
According to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the eighth modification, for example, when the difference in the number of balls is 79985, the game balls that enter the second big winning hole 15 in the small winning game are sent to the second big winning hole sensor. 15a, the predetermined number (for example, 15) of prize balls will not be awarded, so the difference in the number of balls will not reach 80,000. Then, when the difference number of balls is 79985, game balls are detected by the specific area sensor 16a in the small winning game and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of prize balls are awarded, and the difference number of balls is 80000. Even if it reaches , the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is not activated until the execution of the type 2 jackpot game is completed. As a result, for example, in a case where the number of difference balls is 79,985 and there is a possibility that the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, a type 2 jackpot game will not be executed even if a game ball passes through the specific area 16. It is possible to avoid this.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the eighth modification, for example, when the number of differential balls is 79985 and there is a possibility that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the non-specific area sensor Even if a game ball is detected by 17a and the number of difference balls reaches 80,000, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is not activated until the execution of the small winning game is completed. As a result, even if, for example, the number of differential balls is 79,985 and there is a possibility that the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function will be activated, it is possible to avoid a situation where a small winning game ends midway. becomes.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the eighth modification, when the non-specific area sensor 17a detects that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 during the execution of a small winning game, the execution of the small winning game is stopped. Until the end of the game, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is not disabled. Also, if it is detected by the specific area sensor 16a during the execution of a small winning game and the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000, a type 2 jackpot game is executed, so the execution of the type 2 jackpot game ends. Until then, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is not disabled. As a result, even if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more during execution of a small winning game, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is not uncontrollably controlled, and the player is provided with a type 2 jackpot game. becomes possible.

<9th modification example>
In the above form, while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display of the other special symbol cannot be executed, and the variable display of one special symbol is not displayed in the other special symbol. It was configured to be executed with priority over the variable display of special figures. In the ninth modification, the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner even while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the first special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner even while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Configure it to run. That is, the pachinko game machine PY1 of the ninth modification is configured as a pachinko game machine that performs so-called simultaneous fluctuations. Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the ninth modification, it is easy to win a prize in the second grand prize opening 15 by opening the second grand prize opening 15 based on a small win in the high-accuracy non-time saving state (specific gaming state). Since this is an advantageous gaming state, it will also be referred to as a "small win rush state" below.

The game board unit YU of the ninth modification will be described using FIG. 76. As shown in FIG. 76, below the image display device 50 in the game area 6 of the ninth modification example, in the center in the left-right direction, there is provided a first starting port 11 in which the ease with which game balls enter always remains constant. A first starting winning device 11D is provided.

Further, a second big prize winning device 15D including a second big winning hole 15 is provided at the upper right side of the first starting opening 11 in the game area 6 of the ninth modification. This second big prize opening 15 is opened during the execution of the small winning game, but is not opened during the execution of the jackpot game. In other words, it is a dedicated attacker in small winning games.

Moreover, in the upper right of the second big prize winning device 15D in the game area 6 of the ninth modification example, an electric chew 12D is provided with a second starting port 12 that can change the ease with which the game ball enters. .

Furthermore, a first big winning device 14D having a first big winning opening 14 is provided above and to the left of the electric chew 12D in the game area 6 of the ninth modification. This first big prize opening 14 is opened during the execution of the jackpot game, but is not opened during the execution of the small win game. In other words, it is a dedicated attacker in jackpot games.

Furthermore, a gate 13 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the upper right side of the first big prize winning device 14D in the game area 6 of the ninth modification. Furthermore, a plurality of general winning holes 10 are provided at the bottom of the gaming area 6. In particular, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 10 is arranged at the lower left of the electric chew 12D. Further, at the lowest part of the game area 6, an out port 19 is provided for discharging game balls that are hit into the game area 6 but do not win in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 6.

A first starting port 11, a general winning port 10, and an out port 19 are arranged on the first flow path R1. A player can aim to win a prize in the first starting hole 11 or the general winning hole 10 by hitting the game ball so as to flow down the first channel R1. Note that the gate 13 is not arranged on the first flow path R1. Therefore, when the player is left-handed, the electric chew 12D will not be released.

On the other hand, on the second channel R2, there are a gate 13, a first grand prize opening 14 (first grand prize device 14D), a second starting opening 12 (electric chew 12D), a general prize opening 10, and a first prize opening 14 (first grand prize device 14D). Two major winning openings 15 (second major winning device 15D) and an out opening 19 are arranged. By hitting the game ball so that it flows down the second channel R2, the player can pass through the gate 13, enter the first grand prize opening 14, the second starting opening 12, the general prize opening 10, and the second grand prize. You can aim to win the 15th prize.

Here, based on FIG. 77, the flow of the game balls when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the ninth modification example is in the open state and the flow of the game balls when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the closed state will be explained. do. In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball hit toward the right game area 6R by right-handed hitting almost passes through the gate 13 and reaches above the electric chew opening/closing member 12k, as shown in FIG. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 77(A), when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state, the game ball that has reached the upper part of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k, because the electric chew opening/closing member 12k has retreated backward, The ball enters the second starting port 12 as it is. In other words, the player does not go toward the general winning opening 10 or the second big winning opening 15 which are arranged to the left of the electric chew 12D. Therefore, in the low accuracy time saving state, most of the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting port 12 and enter the general winning port 10 because the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is frequently opened. He rarely plays the ball. Furthermore, even if the second big prize opening 15 is opened by executing a small winning game to be described later, the ball hardly ever enters the second big winning hole 15.

Here, in the low accuracy time saving state, the game ball hit to the right almost never reaches the second starting port 12 because the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is frequently opened, as shown in FIG. 77(A). There is almost no chance of winning a prize in the second big prize opening 15 opened by a small winning game. In other words, even if the special drawing 2 lottery is frequently executed and the second grand prize opening 15 is opened relatively frequently due to small winning games, it is almost impossible to win a prize in the second grand prize opening 15.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(B), when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the closed state, the game ball that reaches above the electric chew opening/closing member 12k has the electric chew opening/closing member 12k advanced forward. Therefore, after coming into contact with the electric tube opening/closing member 12k, it flows down to the left. As a result, the game balls flowing down to the left head towards the general winning opening 10 and also towards the second big winning opening 15. Therefore, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving state described later, a game ball hit to the right can enter the general winning hole 10 when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is closed. Furthermore, by executing a small winning game which will be described later, it is possible to enter a ball into the opened second large winning hole 15.

On the other hand, in the case of the high accuracy non-time saving state, the game ball hit to the right may enter the electric chew 12D to some extent as described above. Therefore, the special drawing 2 lottery is executed, and the second big prize opening 15 can be opened by executing the small winning game. In this case, among the game balls hit to the right, the game balls that did not enter the electric chew 12D enter the second big prize opening 15 opened by executing the small winning game, as shown in FIG. 77(B). You can win a prize. In this way, in the high-accuracy, non-time-saving state, it is possible to make the ball enter the electric chew 12D with a certain degree of frequency, and it is also possible to make the second grand prize opening 15 win a prize to a certain extent. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game ball that does not enter the electric chew 12D is set so that it can enter the general winning hole 10 to some extent, as shown in FIG. 77(B).

Therefore, the high probability non-time saving state is an advantageous gaming state in which more prize balls can be won than the low probability time saving state. In other words, in the low-accuracy, time-saving state, the base (ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls) is set not to exceed "1," whereas in the high-accuracy, non-time-saving state, the base is set to "1." is set to exceed.

Returning to the description of the game board unit YU shown in FIG. 76. As shown in FIG. 76, a display device 8 is arranged at the lower right part of the game board 1 of the ninth modification.

In the special figure display device 81 of the ninth modification example, by displaying the special symbol variably (fluctuating display) and then stopping, a lottery (special symbol lottery) based on winnings in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 is performed. , jackpot lottery) results. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a predetermined jackpot symbol (a special symbol with a specific stopping pattern), the first big prize will be won with the release pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (that is, the type of jackpot that was won). A jackpot game (an example of a special game) in which the mouth 14 is opened is played. In addition, if the stopped symbol is a predetermined small winning symbol (a special symbol with a specific stopping pattern), the second large prize opening 15 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed. A winning game (an example of a special game) is played.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the ninth modification example, even while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner, and even while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. This is a pachinko gaming machine PY1 (so-called "pachinko gaming machine capable of simultaneous variation") capable of displaying special symbols in a variable manner.

Next, the jackpot game control table and the small win game control table of the ninth modified example will be explained using FIG. 78. As shown in FIG. 78, there are two types of jackpots (jackpot symbols that are stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display 81a) that can be won by drawing the first special symbol (special symbol 1). Specifically, in the case of a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery, either "jackpot symbol C" or "jackpot symbol D" can be determined as the jackpot symbol. More specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 of the ninth modification determines the "jackpot symbol C" at a rate of 35% and the "jackpot symbol D" at a rate of 65%.

As shown in FIG. 78, there are two types of jackpots (jackpot symbols that are stopped and displayed on the special symbol 2 display 81b) that can be won in the second special symbol (special symbol 2) lottery. The game control microcomputer 101 of the ninth modification example determines whether the jackpot symbol is a "jackpot symbol E" or a "jackpot symbol F" can be determined. More specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 of the ninth modified example determines the "jackpot symbol E" at a rate of 35% and the "jackpot symbol F" at a rate of 65%.

Then, depending on the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol), the gaming state after the jackpot game is controlled to be a time-saving state or a non-time-saving state. Therefore, even if the gaming state after a jackpot game is controlled to a normal probability state, it may be controlled to a time-saving state, and even if it is controlled to a high probability state, it may be controlled to a non-time-saving state. Sometimes. Note that when the time saving state is controlled, the number of time saving times may be set to 100 times.

By the way, in the ninth modification, even in a non-time saving state, a game ball hit to the right is set so that it can enter the electric chew 12D to some extent. That is, in the ninth modification, even in the non-time saving state, it can be determined that the normal symbol lottery is almost a hit, as in the time saving state. In this way, even in the non-time-saving state accompanied by the non-entering easy state, the game ball hit to the right is set to be able to enter the electric chew 12D to some extent. The reason for this will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 78, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery and the "jackpot symbol C" is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the gaming state after the jackpot game is controlled to a low probability time saving state. Ru. In this time saving state, the number of time saving times is set to 100.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 78, if a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery and the "jackpot symbol D" is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, the gaming state after the jackpot game will be in a high-probability non-time-saving state. controlled. In this time saving state, the number of probability changes is set to 10,000 times. In this case, the high probability state substantially continues until the next jackpot is won (the start of the jackpot game), and the probability variation count is set to 10,000.

In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the ninth modified example, when controlled to a high probability state after a jackpot game, the high probability state is a variable display of special symbols a predetermined number of times (10,000 times in the ninth modified example). Alternatively, the game ends when the player wins a jackpot and the jackpot game is executed. In other words, in this embodiment, the high probability state substantially continues until the next jackpot win. Note that the condition for ending the high probability state may be only that the player wins a jackpot and the jackpot game is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, if a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery and the "jackpot symbol E" is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the gaming state after the jackpot game is controlled to a low probability time saving state. be done. In this time saving state, the number of time saving times is set to 100 times.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 78, if a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery and the "jackpot symbol F" is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the gaming state after the jackpot game will be in a high-probability non-time-saving state. controlled. In this time saving state, the number of probability changes is set to 10,000 times. In this case, the high probability state substantially continues until the next jackpot is won (the start of the jackpot game), and the probability variation count is set to 10,000. It should be noted that the "jackpot symbol D" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol and the jackpot game ends, and the "jackpot symbol F" is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol and the jackpot game ends. corresponds to "specific conditions".

As shown in FIG. 78, in the jackpot won in the special drawing 1 lottery, the round game is played four times regardless of whether it is the "jackpot symbol C" or the "jackpot symbol D." From 1R to 4R, the first grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, in the jackpot won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the round game is played 10 times regardless of whether it is the "jackpot symbol E" or the "jackpot symbol F." From 1R to 10R, the first grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Note that the big winning opening may be opened multiple times during one round of the jackpot game or during the small winning game.

In addition, in the ninth modified example, as described above, it is possible to win a small hit only in the special drawing 2 lottery. The opening pattern when a small win is won is as shown in FIG. 78. That is, first, the opening is executed for 0.004 seconds. Next, the second big prize opening 15 is opened once for 1.6 seconds. Finally, the ending is executed for 0.3 seconds. When a small winning is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the small winning symbol b is stopped and displayed on the special drawing 2 display 81b.

In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the ninth modification, the game control microcomputer 101 allows the special chart 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) and the special chart 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) to be performed simultaneously. Further, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the ninth modification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time. Next, using FIG. 79, we will explain that the special pattern 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) and the special pattern 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) are performed at the same time, and that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time. This section explains the following points.

First, as shown in FIG. 79(A), for example, when the determination result in the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) is a loss, the variable display of the first special symbol is started. During the variable display of the first special symbol, if the determination result in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) is a small hit, the variable display of the second special symbol may be started. During the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the variable display of the second special symbol ends first, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the first special symbol To force the fluctuating display of symbols to stop and display at a losing symbol. When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the small winning symbol, a small winning game based on the special symbol 2 lottery is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79(B), for example, when the determination result in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) is a jackpot or a small win, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. If the special pattern 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol, the special pattern 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) will not determine a jackpot and will be determined to be a loss. As a result, when the determination result in the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) is a loss, the variable display of the first special symbol is started. During the fluctuating display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the fluctuating display of the second special symbol ends first, when the jackpot symbol or the small win symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol. , the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at a losing symbol. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the second special symbol, a jackpot game based on the special symbol 2 lottery is executed, or when the small winning symbol is halted and displayed with the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 lottery is executed. A small winning game based on the above is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79(C), for example, when the determination result in the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) is a jackpot, the variable display of the first special symbol is started. If the special pattern 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol, the special pattern 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) will not determine a jackpot or small hit, but will be determined as a loss. be done. As a result, when the determination result in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) is a loss, variable display of the second special symbol is started. During the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the variable display of the first special symbol ends first, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, the second special symbol Forcibly causes the fluctuating display to stop and display at a losing symbol. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, a jackpot game based on the special symbol 1 lottery is executed.

Next, the flow of the game of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the ninth modified example will be explained based on FIG. 80. As shown in FIG. 80, in the ninth modification example, the game is played while transitioning between a low-probability non-time-saving state (normal gaming state), a low-probability non-time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state (small winning rush state). I will do it. Then, settings are made such that the order of low probability non-time saving state⇒low probability time saving state⇒high probability non time saving state is advantageous for the player (more benefits are likely to be granted). In addition, in FIG. 80, the case of transitioning to a high-accuracy non-time saving state is shown by a white arrow, and the case of transitioning to a low-accuracy time-saving state is shown by a dotted arrow, and the case of transitioning to a low-accuracy non-time-saving state is shown by a dotted arrow. The cases are indicated by black arrows.

In the low probability non-time saving state, the game ball is hit to the left in order to win the game ball into the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10. Then, you will be aiming for a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery. As shown in FIG. 80, if a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery in a low-probability, non-time-saving state, the jackpot symbol C will become a jackpot symbol C with a probability of 35%. In this case, in the low probability time saving state after the jackpot game, the number of time saving times is set to 100 times.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery in a low-probability non-time-saving state, the jackpot symbol D will become the jackpot symbol D with a 65% probability. In this case, in the high probability non-time saving state after the jackpot game, the probability variation number is set to 10,000, but the time saving number is not set.

Here, in the low accuracy time saving state, the player aims to hit the ball into the electric chew 12D by hitting the ball to the right. Then, you will aim for a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery. This is because the electric chew 12D is frequently opened due to the high base state. However, as shown in FIG. 77(A), the game ball hit to the right almost never enters the electric chew 12D, so it almost never enters the general winning hole 10 or the second big winning hole 15. Therefore, although the number of balls held does not decrease significantly, it is impossible to increase the number of balls held (base exceeds 1).

As shown in FIG. 80, if a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in a low-probability time-saving state, the jackpot symbol E will become the jackpot symbol E with a probability of 35%. In this case, in the low probability time saving state after the jackpot game, the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. When the variable display of the special symbol ends 100 times in the low-accuracy time-saving state, the state shifts to the low-accuracy non-time-saving state. If you win a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery in a low probability time saving state, the jackpot symbol F will be the jackpot symbol F with a 65% probability. In this case, in the high probability non-time saving state after the jackpot game, the probability variation number is set to 10,000, but the time saving number is not set.

On the other hand, even in a high-accuracy, non-time-saving state, the player aims to hit the ball into the electric chew 12D by hitting the ball to the right. However, in this embodiment, even in the non-time saving state (low base state), game balls that enter the electric chew 12D to some extent but do not enter the electric chew 12D are awarded the general winning prize, as shown in FIG. 77(B). You can win a prize in the opening 10 or the second grand prize opening 15. Therefore, as long as the high-accuracy, non-time-saving state continues (unless the player wins the next jackpot), the player can gradually increase the number of balls he has by winning in the general winning hole 10 and the second big winning hole 15 (when the base is 1 ) is possible.

As shown in FIG. 80, if a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in a high-accuracy, non-time-saving state, the jackpot symbol E will become a jackpot symbol E with a probability of 35%. In this case, in the low probability time saving state after the jackpot game, the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. When the variable display of the special symbol ends 100 times in the low-accuracy time-saving state, the state shifts to the low-accuracy non-time-saving state. If you win a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery in a high-accuracy, non-time-saving state, there is a 65% probability that the jackpot symbol F will be the jackpot symbol. In this case, in the high probability non-time saving state after the jackpot game, the probability variation number is set to 10,000, but the time saving number is not set.

In the low accuracy time saving state, it is more advantageous to advance the game if the game ball enters the second flow path R2 (see FIG. 76) by hitting right. This is because the electric chew 12D is easily opened by the electric support control, and it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 than to win a prize in the first starting port 11. Therefore, while passing the game ball to the gate 13 which is the trigger for the regular symbol lottery, the player performs a right hit in order to make the game ball enter the second starting port 12. This allows you to get more starting prizes (winning into the starting hole) than if you hit left-handed. In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the ninth modification, even during the jackpot game, the player plays the game with the right hand.

On the other hand, in the normal game state, the game can proceed more advantageously if the game ball enters the first channel R1 (see FIG. 76) by hitting to the left. In the ninth modification, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the normal gaming state, the variable display continues for an extremely long time of 600000ms (not shown), making it difficult to obtain the special symbol 2 lottery result for a while. This is because it is not possible. Therefore, in order to cause the game ball to enter the first starting hole 11, the player performs a left-handed hit. This allows you to play the game more smoothly than if you hit right.

In the ninth modification, the special drawing 2 lottery is set so that the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/5, so excluding the normal game state, winning a small win is relatively frequent. Is possible. Therefore, as long as the special drawing 2 lottery continues, small winning games are executed relatively frequently, and the second big prize opening 15 can be opened relatively frequently.

Here, in the ninth modification, since the setting is made such that a game ball hit to the right can enter the electric chew 12D to some extent in the high accuracy non-time saving state, even in the normal gaming state (low accuracy non time saving state), the game ball hit right can enter the electric chew 12D. The played game ball can enter the electric chew 12D. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures to prevent the player from being hit right in the normal gaming state.

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the ninth modification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be varied simultaneously, and the variation time of the second special symbol in the low probability non-time saving state is, for example, 600000ms. (10 minutes), which is an extremely long time. That is, a special symbol variation pattern table dedicated to the low probability non-time saving state is provided so that the variation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long in the low probability non time saving state. Therefore, if the player hits right in the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving state) and enters the electric chew 12D, the second special symbol will be displayed for 10 minutes even if the first special symbol is being displayed fluctuatingly. , the variable display will continue. Therefore, the player cannot obtain the result of the special drawing 2 lottery for an extremely long period of 10 minutes. As described above, even if the player plays right-handed in the normal gaming state, measures are taken to prevent the player from receiving an unfair advantage.

Next, the timing at which the excessive prize ball prevention function of the ninth modification is activated will be explained based on FIG. 81. The over-winning ball prevention function basically operates on the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more (predetermined condition). That is, in the ninth modification, the over-prize ball prevention function is basically activated at the timing when the difference number of balls reaches 80,000.

However, in the ninth modification, even if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more, if the jackpot game is in progress, that is, if the accessory continuous actuation device is activated, the jackpot game is finished. Under this condition (predetermined condition), the excessive prize ball prevention function will be activated. That is, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate at the timing when the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000 during execution of the jackpot game, and the over-prize ball prevention function operates at the timing when the execution of the jackpot game ends. In addition, in the ninth modification, even if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more, if a small winning game is being executed, the overplaying condition is determined on the condition that the execution of the small winning game is completed (predetermined condition). The prize ball prevention function will be activated. In other words, the excessive prize ball prevention function will not operate at the timing when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 during the execution of the small winning game, and the excessive prize ball prevention function will operate at the timing when the execution of the small winning game ends. .

For example, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 81(A). Of course, at this time, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Next, as shown in FIG. 81(A), it is assumed that the number of differential balls reaches 80,000 when the high accuracy non-time saving state is in the middle. At this time, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. In this manner, in this embodiment, the game is stopped in the middle of the high-reliability, non-time-saving state, and it is possible to end the game in the middle of the high-reliability, non-time-saving state.

On the other hand, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 81(B), for example. Of course, at this time, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 when the jackpot game state is in the middle. At this time, the excessive prize ball prevention function does not operate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81(B), when the jackpot game state ends, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. In this way, in this embodiment, the game does not stop during the jackpot gaming state, and it is possible for the player to end the game at a convenient timing when the jackpot gaming state ends.

Further, for example, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 81(C). Of course, at this time, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function does not operate. Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of a small winning game. At this time, the excessive prize ball prevention function does not operate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81(C), when the small winning game ends, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. In this way, in this embodiment, the game does not stop during the small winning game, and it is possible for the player to end the game at a convenient timing when the small winning game ends.

Next, a production example of the ninth modification will be described based on FIG. 82. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 82(A), the probability variation production mode is set, and the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display screen 50a. In addition, at the lower left of the display screen 50a, there is a prize ball number notification image G201 that shows the number of prize balls won by winning game balls into the second big prize opening 15 during the high-accuracy non-time saving state (small winning rush state). is displayed. Note that the performance in which the prize pitch number notification image G201 is displayed on the display screen 50a is a prize pitch number notification performance (prize pitch number performance). The number of prize balls announced image G201 shown in FIG. 82(B) shows "0000pt", so the player is made to understand that the number of prize balls acquired during the small winning rush state is 0. It is now possible. Here, let us assume that you won a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery. In this case, as shown in FIG. 82(B), performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 ("2, 4, 6") indicating that the small winning has been won are stopped and displayed.

After that, if the small winning game is started and three game balls can be entered into the second grand prize opening 15, as shown in FIG. 82(C), the prize balls displayed below the display screen 50a. The number notification image G201 shows "0045pt". By displaying "0045pt" in the prize ball number notification image G201 on the display screen 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the number of prize balls acquired during the small win rush state is 45. It becomes.

When the execution of the small winning game is completed, the special figure 2 lottery is subsequently held, and the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect based on the lottery result is started, and as shown in FIG. 82(D), the The variable display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 is also started.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the ninth modification example, when the number of differential balls reaches a specified number (for example, 70,000) and the high-accuracy non-time-saving state is in effect, the display screen 50a displays an over-prize ball abnormality suggestion effect ( control suggestion performance) is executed. Here, the excessive prize ball abnormality suggestion performance functions as a performance that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more and the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. In addition, in the excessive prize ball abnormality suggestion performance, a difference ball number suggestion image SB imitating an offering box is displayed on the display screen 50a. Here, the difference ball number suggestion image SB includes a first difference ball number suggestion image SB1 indicating that the difference ball number is 70,000 to 72,000, and a first difference ball number suggestion image SB1 indicating that the difference ball number is 72,001 (predetermined number) to 74,000. 2 difference ball number suggestion image SB2, 3rd difference ball number suggestion image SB3 showing that the difference ball number is 74001 to 76000, and 4th difference ball number suggestion image showing that the difference ball number is 76001 to 78000 There is SB4 and a fifth difference ball number suggestion image SB5 indicating that the difference ball number is 78,001 to 80,000. The offering box is placed in the following order: 1st difference ball number suggestion image SB1 ⇒ 2nd difference ball number suggestion image SB2 ⇒ 3rd difference ball number suggestion image SB3 ⇒ 4th difference ball number suggestion image SB4 ⇒ 5th difference ball number suggestion image SB5 As the number increases, this indicates that there is an increasing possibility that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function will be activated in stages and the game will be controlled in an unexecutable manner. In addition, in the ninth modification, first difference ball number suggestion image SB1⇒second difference ball number suggestion image SB2⇒third difference ball number suggestion image SB3⇒fourth difference ball number suggestion image SB4⇒fifth difference ball number suggestion The offering boxes may shrink in the order of image SB5. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the difference in number of balls is being used in stages to reach 80,000. In addition, the performance mode of the over-prized ball abnormality suggestion performance in which the first difference number of balls suggestion image SB1 is displayed corresponds to the "first performance mode", and the performance mode of the over-prized ball abnormality suggestion performance in which the first difference number of balls suggestion image SB1 is displayed, The presentation mode of the abnormality suggestion presentation corresponds to the "second presentation mode."

In addition, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the ninth modification, the execution of the excessive prize ball abnormality suggestion effect on the display screen 50a is completed, and the display screen 50a An operation notification performance (control notification performance) indicating that the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated is executed. In the operation notification effect, an operation notification image HB imitating an offering box that has been destroyed due to excessive expansion is displayed on the display screen 50a. In addition, in the operation announcement performance, an operation announcement image HB imitating an offering box that has been destroyed due to excessive expansion is displayed on the display screen 50a, but it is not necessary to be limited to this. For example, an operation notification image HB resembling a flat offertory box that looks like it has been crushed is displayed on the display screen 50a.

The over-prized ball abnormality suggestion presentation will be explained using FIG. 83. When the number of difference balls reaches 70,000 and the state is in a high-accuracy non-time-saving state, when the special symbol variation effect is being executed, the example of effect shown in FIG. 83(A) is performed. In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 83, it is assumed that the special symbol fluctuation production is executed based on the fact that the special symbol 2 lottery result is a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 83(A), since the special symbol fluctuation performance is being executed, the fluctuation display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is being performed, and the fluctuation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is also being performed. It is being done.

When the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 and it is in a high-accuracy non-time saving state, as shown in FIG. A difference ball number suggestion image SB1 is displayed. By displaying the first difference ball number suggestion image SB1 at the lower right of the display screen 50a, it is possible to make the player understand that there are 10,000 to 8,001 balls remaining up to 80,000. Furthermore, a prize ball number notification image G201 indicating "1940 pt" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 50a. By displaying the prize ball number notification image G201 indicating "1940 pt" on the display screen 50a, it is possible to make the user understand that the number of prize balls acquired during the small winning rush state is 1940.

After that, the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect is finished, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 ("2, 4, 6") that suggest winning a small hit are definitively stopped and displayed, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 ("2, 4, and 6") are definitely stopped and displayed.

In the ninth modification, when a game ball enters the second big prize opening 15 in a small winning game while the over-prize ball abnormality suggestion performance is being executed, the winning ball winning performance (additional notification performance) is executed. executed. Here, the entering prize ball acquisition effect means that the prize ball addition image NS ("+15") is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the prize ball addition image NS is absorbed into the difference ball number suggestion image SB. The performance is made to look like this. By executing the entering prize ball winning performance, the difference in the number of balls is 70,000 or more, and the game ball is entered into the second grand prize opening 15 in the small winning game, and the difference in the number of balls is added. This makes it possible for players to understand this.

When a small winning game is executed and four game balls enter the second large winning hole 15 during the execution of the small winning game, an example of performance shown in FIG. 83(B) is performed. As shown in FIG. 83(B), when the entering prize ball acquisition effect is executed, the four prize ball addition images NS displayed on the display screen 50a are absorbed into the first difference ball number suggestion image SB1. It's making it look like it's there. By making it appear as if the four prize ball addition images NS have been absorbed into the first difference ball number suggestion image SB1 on the display screen 50a, if the difference ball number is 70,000 or more and the small winning game is being executed. It is now possible for the player to understand that 60 prize balls have been obtained based on the entry of four game balls into the second grand prize opening 15, and that the difference in the number of balls has increased by 60. There is. Further, the entering prize ball acquisition performance may be a performance that makes it appear as if the prize ball addition image NS ("+15") displayed on the display screen 50a is released from the difference ball number suggestion image SB. .

After that, when the execution of the next special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. , the variable display of small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 ("2, 4, 6") is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 83(C), a prize ball number notification image G201 indicating "2000 pt" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 50a. By displaying the prize ball number notification image G201 indicating "2000pt" on the display screen 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that 2000 prize balls have been acquired during the small winning rush state. There is. Further, as shown in FIG. 83(C), a second difference ball number suggestion image SB2 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 50a. By changing the display of the first difference ball number suggestion image SB1 shown in FIG. 83(B) to the display of the second difference ball number suggestion image SB2 shown in FIG. 83(C) on the display screen 50a, the game This makes it possible for the player to understand that the difference in the number of balls is 72,001 to 74,000.

With reference to FIG. 84, an explanation will be given of an operation notification effect that is executed when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is stopped. When the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 during the small winning game in the high probability non-time saving state and the execution of the small winning game ends, the process proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 84(A).

As shown in FIG. 84(A), the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 ("2, 4, and 6") suggesting that the small winning has been won are definitively stopped and displayed, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 are also definitely displayed as stopped. Further, as shown in FIG. 84(A), a prize ball number notification image G201 indicating "10000 pt" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 50a. By displaying the prize ball number announcement image G201 indicating "10,000pt" on the display screen 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that he has won 10,000 prize balls in the small win rush state. There is. Further, as shown in FIG. 84(A), a fifth difference ball number suggestion image SB5 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 50a. By displaying the fifth difference number of balls suggestion image SB5 on the display screen 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the difference number of balls is 78,001 to 80,000.

Thereafter, when the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the process proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 84(B). When the operation notification effect is executed, an operation notification image HB is displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 84(B). By displaying the operation notification image HB on the display screen 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is stopped.

Thereafter, the execution of the operation notification effect is finished, and the display of the operation notification image HB on the display screen 50a is finished. Then, as shown in FIG. 84(C), a game stop notification image YT is displayed on the display screen 50a. By displaying the game stop notification image YT on the display screen 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function has been activated and the game has been stopped.

Next, control by the effect control microcomputer 121 of the ninth modification will be explained using FIGS. 85 to 88. Note that a detailed explanation of the same processing as that of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the sixth modification example will be omitted.

[Received command analysis process] In the received command analysis process (S4201) of the ninth modification, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether (S4301), and if it is received, processing at the time of starting winning is performed (S4302).

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command or special figure 2 fluctuation start command) has been received from the main control board 100 (S4303), and determines whether or not it has been received. If so, a variable performance start process is performed (S4304).

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a special symbol fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4305), and if it has received it, performs a fluctuation performance end process (S4306).

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4307), and if so, performs opening performance selection processing (S4308).

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a round game command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4309), and if so, performs round performance selection processing (S4310).

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4311), and if so, performs an ending production selection process (S4312).

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a game stop notification command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4313), and if it has received it, performs a game stop notification display process (S4314). In the game stop notification display process (S4314), the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the game stop notification command, and sets the game stop notification display start command to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 based on the analysis result. When the game stop notification command set in step S4314 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4006), an operation notification effect is executed and an operation notification image HB is displayed on the display screen 50a. . When a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation notification image HB was displayed, the game stop notification image YT is displayed, and then the production example shown in FIG. 27(A) is performed. By displaying the activation notification image HB on the display screen 50a, it is possible to notify the player that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is controlled to be impossible to execute.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the total prize ball number command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4316), and if it has received it, performs the prize ball number announcement process described later (S4317). Then, a prize ball acquisition effect processing (S4318), which will be described later, is performed.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the difference ball number command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4319), and if it has received it, performs an over-prize ball abnormality suggestion process to be described later (S4320). I do.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 performs other processing (S4315) based on received commands other than the above-mentioned commands (for example, processing for performing production accompanying the fluctuating display of normal symbols, etc.). Then, the received command analysis process (S4201) ends.

[Prize ball number notification performance processing] In the prize ball number notification performance processing (S4317) of the ninth modification, as shown in FIG. Parse the command (S4601).

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether the production mode being set is the variable probability production mode (S4602). If it is determined that the variable probability production mode is being set (YES in S4602), it is determined whether or not the prize ball number notification image G201 is being displayed on the display screen 50a (S4603). Further, if it is determined that a production mode other than the variable probability production mode is being set (NO in S4602), this process is immediately ended.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the prize pitch number announcement image G201 is not being displayed on the display screen 50a (NO in S4603), it sets a prize pitch number announcement image start command in the output buffer of the production RAM 124. (S4604). When the prize ball number notification image command set in step S4604 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4006), the prize ball number notification image G201 indicating "0000pt" is displayed on the display screen 50a. (See FIG. 82(A)). By displaying the prize ball number notification image G201 indicating "0000 pt" on the display screen 50a, the player can receive the prize balls won by entering the game ball into the second grand prize opening 15 in a high-accuracy, non-time-saving state. It is possible to indicate the number (see FIG. 82(A)).

If the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the prize ball number announcement image G201 is being displayed on the display screen 50a (YES in S4603), the performance control microcomputer 121 opens the second grand prize opening 15 based on the result of the analysis in step S4601. It is determined whether the number of prize balls based on winnings has been added (S4605). If the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of prize balls based on the winning in the second grand prize opening 15 has been added (YES in S4605), the production control microcomputer 121 sends the prize ball number notification image update command to the output buffer of the production RAM 124. (S4606). When the prize ball number notification update image command set in step S4606 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4006), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number notification image G201 is added on the display screen 50a. (See FIGS. 82(C) and 83(C)). By adding the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls notification image G201 on the display screen 50a, the player can receive the prize balls won by entering the game ball into the second grand prize opening 15 in a highly accurate non-time saving state. It is possible to show that the numbers have been added (see FIGS. 82(C) and 83(C)). In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of prize balls based on winning into the second grand prize opening 15 has not been added (NO in S4605), this process is immediately ended.

[Entering prize ball acquisition production processing] In the entry prize ball obtaining production processing (S4318) of the ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 87, the production control microcomputer 121 first changes the production mode being set to the variable probability production mode. It is determined whether or not (S4701). When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the variable probability performance mode is being set (YES in S4701), it determines whether the over-prize ball abnormality suggestion performance is being executed (S4702). In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that a performance mode other than the variable probability performance mode is being set (NO in S4701), this process is immediately ended.

If the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the over-prize ball abnormality suggestion performance is being executed (YES in S4702), it sets the entry prize ball acquisition performance start command to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 (S4703). ). When the entry prize ball acquisition production start command set in step S4703 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4006), the prize ball addition image NS ("+15") is displayed on the display screen 50a. Ball number suggestion image SB (first difference ball number suggestion image SB1, second difference ball number suggestion image SB2, third difference ball number suggestion image SB3, fourth difference ball number suggestion image SB4, fifth difference ball number suggestion image SB5 ) is executed (see FIG. 83(B)). By displaying the prize ball addition image NS on the display screen 50a, it is possible to show the player that the difference number of balls has been added.

[Over-prize ball abnormality suggestion production processing] In the over-prize ball abnormality suggestion production processing (S4321) of the ninth modification, as shown in FIG. Parse several commands (S4801).

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether the production mode being set is the variable probability production mode (S4802). If the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the variable probability production mode is being set (YES in S4802), the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference number of balls is 70,000 or more based on the result of analyzing the difference number of balls command in step S4801. It is determined whether there is one (S4803). In addition, if the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the production mode being set is a production mode other than the variable probability production mode (NO in S4802), or if it determines that the difference in the number of balls is less than 70,000 (in S4803) If NO), this process ends.

If the production control microcomputer 121 determines in step S4803 that the difference number of balls is 70,000 or more (YES in S4803), it determines whether or not the difference ball number suggestion image SB is being displayed on the display screen 50a. Determine (S4804). If the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference ball number suggestion image SB is being displayed (YES in S4804), it changes the difference ball number suggestion image SB being displayed to another difference ball number suggestion image SB. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether the difference number of balls has reached a predetermined number (any difference number of balls among 72001, 74001, 76001, or 78001) (S4805). Moreover, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference ball number suggestion image SB is not displayed (NO in S4804), the process proceeds to step S4807.

The production control microcomputer 121 changes the number of difference balls suggestion image SB to another number of difference balls suggestion image SB in step S4805, that is, when the number of difference balls is a predetermined number (among 72001, 74001, 76001, or 78001), If it is determined that any difference in the number of balls has been reached (YES in S4805), a difference ball number suggestion image change command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S4806). When the difference ball number suggestion image change command set in step S4806 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4006), the difference ball number suggestion image SB displayed on the display screen 50a is The image is changed to the difference ball number suggestion image SB. Specifically, when the first difference ball number suggestion image SB1 is displayed on the display screen 50a, it is changed to the second difference ball number suggestion image SB2. By displaying the second difference ball number suggestion image SB2 on the display screen 50a, there is a greater possibility that the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function will be activated than when the first difference ball number suggestion image SB1 is displayed on the display screen 50a. It is now possible to suggest to the player that the price is high. Moreover, when the second difference ball number suggestion image SB2 is displayed on the display screen 50a, it is changed to the third difference ball number suggestion image SB3. By displaying the third difference ball number suggestion image SB3 on the display screen 50a, there is a greater possibility that the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function will be activated than when the second difference ball number suggestion image SB2 is displayed on the display screen 50a. It is now possible to suggest to the player that the price is high. When the third difference ball number suggestion image SB3 is displayed on the display screen 50a, it is changed to the fourth difference ball number suggestion image SB4. By displaying the fourth difference ball number suggestion image SB4 on the display screen 50a, there is a greater possibility that the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function will be activated than when the third difference ball number suggestion image SB3 is displayed on the display screen 50a. It is now possible to suggest to the player that the price is high. When the fourth difference ball number suggestion image SB4 is displayed on the display screen 50a, the fifth difference ball number suggestion image SB25 is changed. By displaying the fifth difference ball number suggestion image SB5 on the display screen 50a, there is a greater possibility that the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function will be activated than when the fourth difference ball number suggestion image SB4 is displayed on the display screen 50a. It is now possible to suggest to the player that the price is high. In addition, if the difference number of balls suggestion image SB is not changed to another difference number of balls suggestion image SB in step S4805, that is, if the number of difference balls is a predetermined number (any one of 72001, 74001, 76001, or 78001) If it is determined that the number has not been reached (NO in S4805), the process is immediately terminated.

In addition, if it is determined in step S4804 that the difference ball number suggestion image SB is not displayed on the display screen 50a (NO in S4804), the production control microcomputer 121 sends the difference ball number suggestion image start command to the production RAM 124. Set in the output buffer of (S4807). When the difference ball number suggestion image start command set in step S4807 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4006), the first difference ball number suggestion image SB1 is displayed on the display screen 50a ( (See FIG. 83(A)). By displaying the first difference number of balls suggestion image SB1 on the display screen 50a, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function will be activated.

<Operations and effects of the ninth modification>
Since the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is stopped, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player. However, it is a situation where the player is not given any information regarding the suspension of the game until the number of differential balls reaches 80,000 or more, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, and the game is stopped. It's cruel. Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the ninth modification, there is an over-prized ball abnormality suggestion performance that suggests the possibility that the game is controlled to be unexecutable, and an incoming prize ball that indicates that the difference in the number of balls has been added. It is possible for the player to confirm the acquired performance. This avoids a situation in which the player is not given any information regarding the suspension of the game until the number of differential balls becomes 80,000 or more, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, and the game is stopped. , it is possible to make the player aware that the game may be stopped.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the ninth modification, when the number of difference balls reaches 72001, the first difference ball number suggestion image SB1 displayed on the display screen 50a indicates that the difference number of balls is 72001 to 74000. The image is changed to a second difference ball number suggestion image SB2 that suggests the following. As a result, the player who is paying attention to the difference ball number suggestion image SB displayed on the display screen 50a is informed that by changing the difference ball number suggestion image SB, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is stopped. This makes it possible to understand that the possibilities are increasing. Therefore, by checking the difference number of balls suggestion image SB displayed on the display screen 50a, you can see that the possibility that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is gradually activated and the game is controlled to be impossible to execute is increasing. It becomes possible to make them understand.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the ninth modification, by executing the operation notification effect in which the operation notification image HB is displayed on the display screen 50a, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, and the game is stopped. It is possible for the player to understand that the game will be stopped. Thereby, it becomes possible to urge the player to stop playing the game using the operation notification image HB displayed on the display screen 50a.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the ninth modification, the prize balls obtained by entering the second large prize opening 15 during the small hit rush state are indicated by the prize ball number notification image G201 displayed on the display screen 50a. In addition to letting the player grasp the number of balls, it is also possible to make the player grasp the difference in the number of balls using the difference ball number suggestion image SB. As a result, by using the prize ball number notification image G201 and the difference ball number suggestion image SB displayed on the display screen 50a, it is possible to predict to a certain extent until the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is stopped, and the game can be started. It becomes possible to make it happen.

In addition, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the ninth modification, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving state (small hit rush), the prize ball number notification image G201 displayed on the display screen 50a causes the second large hit during the small hit rush. It is possible for the player to grasp the number of prize balls won by entering the winning hole 15 and to some extent understand the current number of differential balls by the differential ball number suggestion image SB displayed on the display screen 50a. As a result, until the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is stopped, how many prize balls can be won by winning a game ball into the second big prize opening 15 in a small winning game during a small winning rush? It is possible to have the player play the game while predicting whether or not he or she will be able to win the number.

<Other variations>
In the above form, it is configured as a so-called V-probability machine (a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability state based on the passing of the game ball to the specific area 16 (V area)), but the high probability is determined based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol. It may be configured as a gaming machine in which transition to a probability state is determined. In addition, in the above embodiment, it is configured as a so-called ST machine (a gaming machine in which the high probability state ends depending on the number of changes in the special symbol), but once it is controlled to the high probability state, the high probability state remains until the start of the next jackpot game. It may be configured as a gaming machine in which control continues (a so-called variable loop type machine) or a falling machine (a gaming machine in which a high probability state ends depending on the lottery result). Furthermore, when a small win is won in the special drawing lottery, a small win game in which the big prize opening is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds may be implemented as a gaming machine. In this case, it may be configured as a gaming machine in which a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed when a game ball that enters the jackpot due to execution of the small jackpot passes through a specific area in the jackpot. . Then, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing lottery, a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) is executed, and when the game ball passes through a specific area in the jackpot, a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed. It may also be configured as a seed jackpot game.

In the above form, if the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated when the number of difference balls reaches 80,000, or if the number of difference balls becomes 80,000 or more during the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is executed. At the end of the game, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function was activated. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 89, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the transition is made from the high probability high base state (advantageous gaming state) to the normal gaming state (see FIG. 89) or the low probability high base state ( When transitioning from the advantageous gaming state) to the normal gaming state, an over-prize ball prevention function may be activated. For example, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 89(A). Of course, at this time, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Next, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 89(B). At this time, the excessive prize ball prevention function does not operate. Subsequently, even at the timing of transitioning from this jackpot game state to the high-accuracy, high-base state, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89(C), at the timing of transition from the high-accuracy, high-base state to the normal gaming state, the over-winning ball prevention function is activated. In this way, in this embodiment, the game does not stop in the middle of the jackpot game state or the high probability high base state, and the game can be ended at a good timing when the advantageous game state ends for the player. It is possible.

Further, for example, the presentation mode when the number of differential balls reaches 70,000 in pachinko gaming machine PY1 when the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated at the timing shown in FIG. 89 will be explained based on FIG. 89(A). . As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 89(A). First, as shown in FIG. 90(A), a round image G109 and a prize ball number image G110 are displayed on the display screen 50a. When the difference number of balls reaches 70,000, a purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a, and an over-prize image EFa is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a, indicating that "over-prize ball abnormality with 10,000 shots left". A ball preview image KY is displayed. By displaying the purple border image EFa and the over-prized ball preview image KY, it is possible for the player to grasp the situation where the over-prized ball prevention function is about to be activated. The display of the purple border image EFa continues even after the jackpot game state ends, but the display of the super prize ball preview image KY ends when the jackpot game state ends. Note that the over-prize ball preview image KY may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot game state ends.

Next, an explanation will be given based on FIG. 90(B) regarding the presentation mode when the number of differential balls reaches 80,000 in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated at the timing shown in FIG. 89. . As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 89(B). As shown in FIG. 89(B), a round image G109 and a prize ball number image G110 are displayed on the display screen 50a. When the number of differential balls reaches 80,000, a red border image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a, and a rush game stop notice image indicating that the game is stopped when the rush ends is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. KHR is displayed. By displaying the red edge image EFb and the rush game stop notice image KHR, it is possible for the player to know that the game stop is approaching and when the game will be stopped. The display of the red edge image EFb continues even after the jackpot gaming state ends, but the display of the game stop notice image KH ends when the jackpot gaming state ends. Note that the rush game stop notice image KHR may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot game state ends.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 in which the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated at the timing shown in FIG. 89, after the number of difference balls reaches 70,000 at the timing shown in FIG. The presentation mode in this state is as shown in FIG. 91(A). That is, as shown in FIG. 91(A), on the display screen 50a, the probability variation background image G105 is displayed, and the effect pattern EZ is displayed in a variable manner. A purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a. This purple edge image EFa allows the player to play the game while being aware that the difference in the number of balls has reached 70,000.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 in which the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated at the timing shown in FIG. 89, after the number of differential balls reaches 80,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 89(B), the high accuracy high base state The presentation mode is as shown in FIG. 91(B). That is, as shown in FIG. 91(B), on the display screen 50a, the probability variation background image G105 is displayed, and the effect pattern EZ is displayed in a variable manner. A red edge image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a. This red edge image EFb allows the player to play the game while being aware that the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 in which the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated at the timing shown in FIG. (see FIG. 25), or when transitioning from a low-probability-high base state (advantageous gaming state) to a normal gaming state, the over-winning ball prevention function is activated. However, the excessive prize ball prevention function may be activated not only when the advantageous gaming state is transferred to the normal gaming state, but also when the advantageous gaming state ends. For example, when transitioning from a high-accuracy, high-base state (advantageous gaming state) to a low-accuracy, high-base state, or from a high-accuracy, high-base state to a high-accuracy, low-base state, the over-winning ball prevention function is activated. You can also do it.

For example, as shown in FIG. 92, when transitioning from the high-probability-high base state to the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the maximum number of reserved special drawings 2 is 4 (predetermined number). The special figure 2 lottery is executed with priority over the special figure 1 lottery, and is set to be more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery. In this case, when the state shifts from the high probability/high base state to the normal gaming state, the special drawing 2 lottery will be executed four times, and it can be said that the advantageous state for the player still continues. Therefore, in this case, it is assumed that the game is in an advantageous gaming state until all of the remaining special drawing 2 reservations (special drawing 2 remaining reservations) are used up when the state shifts to the normal gaming state. Then, when all the remaining special symbols 2 are used up (when the variable display and stop display of the 2nd special symbol based on the remaining 2 special symbols are all finished), the over-prize ball prevention function is activated (game (see FIG. 92). In addition, the special figure 1 lottery may be executed with priority over the special figure 2 lottery, or the special figure 1 lottery or special figure lottery may be executed in priority order than the special figure 2 lottery. The lottery shown in FIG. 2 may be executed.

In particular, if it is a 1st type 2nd type mixing machine and you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery, the 2nd type jackpot game will be executed practically (the game ball can pass through a specific area). In this case, as shown in FIG. 92, it is preferable that the over-prize ball prevention function is activated when all the remaining special symbols 2 are used up in the normal gaming state. This is because even if the state shifts from the high base state (time saving state) to the normal game state, the type 2 jackpot game is very likely to be executed until all of the remaining reserved special symbols 2 are used up. That is, if the game becomes impossible to execute due to the activation of the over-prize ball prevention function at the timing when the high base state ends, the chance to win the type 2 jackpot game will be lost, which will be bad for the player. Note that the upper limit number of special drawings 2 reserved is not limited to four, but may be one, for example, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above other modification example, the timing at which the over-prize ball prevention function is activated is when the high-accuracy, high-base state ends, or when the low-accuracy, high-base state ends. However, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated only when the high-accuracy, high-base state ends. In this case, it is possible to stop the game only when the so-called "rush state (consecutive game period)" ends. Further, for example, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated at the timing when the difference in number of balls is 80,000 or more and the state shifts to the customer waiting state, or at the timing when the customer waiting state continues for a certain fixed period of time. Further, for example, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated at the timing when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more.

In the above embodiment, the first reset condition is that the special reset switch 181 (special operation means) is pressed (see FIG. 26(A)), or the second condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time). When the reset condition (see FIG. 26(B)) is satisfied, the difference in the number of balls is reset (erased). However, the reset conditions are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as described above, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated at the timing when the jackpot game state ends or when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, as shown in FIG. The difference in the number of balls may be reset when transitioning from the high probability base state (advantageous gaming state) to the normal gaming state. In this case, the difference in number of balls is reset when the so-called "rush state (consecutive play period)" ends, so only if the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000 (standard number) during one rush state. , it is possible to activate the over-prize ball prevention function. In addition to the high-accuracy, high-base state and the low-accuracy, high-base state, the number of differential balls may be reset when transitioning from an advantageous gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state or a high-accuracy, low-base state to a normal gaming state. . Further, the number of differential balls may be reset by pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180.

For example, as shown in FIG. 93(B), when the normal game state continues for a specific time (for example, one hour), the difference number of balls may be reset. In this case, if the normal gaming state continues for a specific period of time (for example, one hour), it means that the situation advantageous to the player has not continued for a while. Therefore, in this case, by resetting the difference number of balls, it is possible to prevent the difference number of balls from exceeding 80,000 for a while. Note that the above-described specific time is not limited to one hour, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, for example, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a specific number in the normal game state, the number of difference balls may be reset. Further, for example, the difference in the number of balls may be reset by turning the power off and on (turning the power back on). Further, for example, the difference in the number of balls may be reset by turning the power OFF and ON (returning the power on) and operating a dedicated operation means for resetting the difference in the number of balls.

For example, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9 am), the difference number of balls may be reset. In this case, it is possible to automatically eliminate the difference in the number of balls without forcing the employees of the gaming hall to perform any operations. Note that the reference time described above is not limited to 9:00 a.m., and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, a special reset switch 181 (special operation means) for resetting the number of differential balls is arranged on the main control board 100 (see FIG. 8). However, if a signal based on the operation of the special operation means is input to the game control microcomputer 101, the location of the special operation means for resetting the difference number of balls can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, the special operation means may be arranged, for example, on the payout control board 170 or on a dedicated board.

In the above embodiment, the measured number of differential balls was not displayed on the display means. However, the measured number of differential balls may be displayed on the display means. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the measured number of difference balls on the display 8 (see FIG. 4) or the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 9). In this case, for example, when the number of differential balls is 0 to 50,000 (first range), the first mode is displayed on the display 8 or the 7-segment display 300, and the number of differential balls is 50,001 to 70,000. (second range), the second mode is displayed on the display 8 or the 7-segment display 300, and when the difference in the number of balls is between 70,001 and 80,000 (third range), the second mode is displayed. The third aspect may be displayed on the appliance 8 or 7 segment display 300. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits information on the number of differential balls (or information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls) to the production control board 120, and the production control microcomputer 121 displays the image. The difference in the number of balls may be displayed on a display means such as the device 50. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits information on the number of prize balls that have been paid out (or the number of prize balls that are scheduled to be paid out) and information on detection by the discharge port sensor to the production control board 120. Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 may calculate the difference number of balls based on this information, and thereby display the difference number of balls on a display means such as the image display device 50.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the number of difference balls on the 7-segment display 300, as in a modification shown in FIG. That is, in this modification, the information on the difference number of balls is divided into four sections (predetermined sections), and is stored in the four storage areas of the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107, respectively. . The first storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on this time to the present time. The second storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on last time (one time before) until when the power was turned off last time. The third storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on two times before (two times ago) until when the power was turned off two times before. The 4th (N)th storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on two previous times (three times ago) to when the power was turned off two previous times. In this way, each time the power is turned off and on, the measured difference in the number of balls is shifted and stored, and the difference in the number of balls stored in the fourth storage area is erased. Note that the information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the first to fourth storage areas is not erased even if RAM clear is executed.

In this modification, the number of difference balls stored in the first storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the second storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the third storage area, 4 The difference number of balls stored in the second storage area is displayed in the right two digits (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340) of the 7-segment display 300, switching sequentially in units of 1,000 balls. Ru. Specifically, on the 7-segment display 300, as shown in FIG. 94(A), for example, "bL36" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the current normal base is 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), for example, "b134" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the previous normal base was 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), for example, "b238" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the normal base two times ago was 38%. Next, as shown in FIG. 53(D), for example, "b235" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the normal base three times ago was 38%.

Subsequently, on the 7-segment display 300, as shown in FIG. 94(E), for example, "cL20" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on this time to the present time is 20,000. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(F), for example, "c100" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the difference in the number of balls between when the power was turned on last time (one time before) and when the power was turned off last time is "0". Note that if the total number of fired balls is greater than the total number of prized balls and the difference in the number of balls is smaller than "0", "0" is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(G), for example, "c265" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on the second time before (two times ago) to when the power was turned off the second time before the previous time was 65,000. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(H), for example, "c348" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on two times before last (three times ago) to when the power was turned off two times before last was 48,000. Thereafter, FIGS. 94(A) to 94(H) are repeatedly displayed every 5 seconds.

In the above-mentioned modification, each time the power is turned OFF and ON (re-energized), the measured difference number of balls is shifted and stored, and the difference number of balls stored in the 4th (N)th storage area is is now deleted. However, each time RAM clearing is executed, the measured difference number of balls may be shifted and stored, and the difference number of balls stored in the 4th (N)th storage area may be deleted. . Alternatively, when the game control microcomputer determines that it is a predetermined time (for example, 9 a.m.), the measured difference number of balls is shifted and stored in the 4th (N) storage area. The difference in the number of balls may be deleted. Note that N described above can be changed as appropriate as long as it is a natural number of 2 or more.

In the above-mentioned modification, as shown in FIG. 94, the display of the difference number of balls was automatically switched every 5 seconds on the 7-segment display 300. However, the display of the difference number of balls may be changed by operating a predetermined operating means, such as pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180. Further, the display of the normal base and the display of the difference number of balls may be switched by operating a predetermined operating means.

In the above embodiment, when the number of differential balls reaches 70,000 (predetermined number), the performance mode shown in FIG. 28(A) indicates that the over-prize ball prevention function is approaching activation. However, the presentation mode indicating that the over-prize ball prevention function is approaching activation is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 28(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The difference in number of balls is 70,000") or a special light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the panel lamp 54 or the frame lamp 53 indicates that the excessive prize ball prevention function is approaching activation. It may also be shown as follows. Furthermore, as the number of differential balls increases, it may be shown that the excessive prize ball prevention function is approaching activation by a presentation mode that changes in multiple stages.

In the above embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 80,000 (reference number), the effect mode shown in FIG. 28(B) shows a situation where the game can be stopped. However, the presentation mode indicating a situation where the game may be stopped is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 28(B), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a situation in which the game may be stopped may be indicated by a special sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The difference in number of balls is 80,000") or by a special light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the board lamp 54 or the frame lamp 53. good.

In the above embodiment, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the presentation mode shown in FIG. 27(A) indicates a situation in which the game cannot be executed. However, the presentation mode indicating a situation in which a game cannot be executed is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 27(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, an image indicating "The game cannot be played" may be displayed on the display screen 50a, or a special sound (for example, "The game cannot be played") may be output from the speaker 52.

In the above embodiment, even if RAM clearing is executed, the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c is not deleted. However, even if the information on the difference number of balls is stored in a predetermined storage area (erase storage section) of the gaming RAM 104, and when the RAM clear is executed, the information on the difference number of balls is cleared. good. In other words, the conditions for resetting the difference number of balls include that RAM clearing is executed, or the reset condition for resetting the difference number of balls is only that RAM clearing is executed. Also good.

In the above embodiment, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process related to the game (processing of steps S102 to S108, see FIG. 32), but also causes the game ball to be fired. The launch control processing (processing of step 109, see FIG. 32) was also stopped. However, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the game control process, but may not stop the firing control process. However, in this case, even if the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game ball flows down the game area 6 by the player's rotation operation on the handle 72k. Therefore, there is a problem in that it is difficult to immediately grasp the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the firing control process, it is possible for the player to quickly understand the situation in which the game cannot be executed. For example, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the firing control process, but may not stop the game control process. However, in this case, at the timing when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game ball may still be flowing down the game area 6, and the game ball may enter the various prize openings and award the player a prize. There is a problem that balls can be applied. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the firing control process, it is possible to ensure that prize balls are not awarded to the player after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated.

In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 counted the total number of balls fired based on the detection of the discharge port sensor. However, based on the detection of the sensors that detect winnings in various winning holes (first starting hole sensor, second starting hole sensor, general winning hole sensor, first big winning hole sensor, second big winning hole sensor 15a), , the total number of balls fired may be counted. Alternatively, if a return ball prevention portion is provided at the upper end of the inner wall portion 1B, and a sensor capable of detecting game balls is provided in this return ball prevention portion, the total The number of balls fired may be counted.

In the above embodiment, when the number of differential balls reaches 70,000, the over-prized ball preview image KY is displayed as shown in FIG. 28(A). However, regardless of the difference in the number of balls, the game becomes unplayable under the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more in customer waiting performances, performances during jackpot games (e.g. ending performances), preview performances accompanying variable performances, etc. You may perform a performance that explains what will happen. This is because such an effect allows players and employees of the gaming parlor to be informed in advance that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a function to prevent over-winning balls.

In the above embodiment, by storing information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and information on the difference number of balls in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104, even if the RAM is cleared, the total prize Information on the number of pitches, total number of fired balls, and difference number of balls will not be deleted. However, by storing information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and information on the number of differential balls in a nonvolatile storage means (for example, FRAM (registered trademark)) provided separately from the gaming RAM 104, Even if RAM clearing is executed, information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and information on the number of difference balls may not be deleted.

In the above embodiment, the number of differential balls is counted at any time after the power is turned on. However, the counting of the difference number of balls may start from the so-called first win (winning the jackpot in the normal gaming state). In this case, the negative difference in the number of balls (that is, the total number of balls fired) from when the power is turned on until the first hit is not counted. Therefore, it is possible to make the difference in the number of balls that triggers the over-winning ball prevention function to be the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 separately counts the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls, and calculates the difference number of balls by subtracting the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls. However, the number of difference balls may be measured (counted) using only the difference ball counter for counting the number of difference balls. That is, each time there is a prize ball, the value of the prize ball is added to the difference ball counter. Furthermore, each time a game ball is fired (every time the discharge port sensor detects the ball), the value of the difference ball counter is subtracted. In this way, the number of differential balls may be measured without separately counting the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls. In this case, the value of the difference ball counter may be set to always be "0" or more without becoming negative. In this way, as described above, the difference in the number of balls that triggers the activation of the over-prize ball prevention function can be made substantially the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the above embodiment, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated on the condition that the difference number of balls (specific measured number) is 80,000 (standard number) or more. However, the number of difference balls (reference number) that is the standard for the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function is not limited to 80,000, but may be 50,000, 100,000, or 120,000, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the specific measurement number that triggers the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function is the difference number of balls, which is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls. However, from the viewpoint of not awarding excessive prize balls, the specific measurement number can be changed as appropriate as long as it is based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player. For example, the specific measured number may be the number of differential balls limited to a certain game state such as a jackpot game state or a certain period such as a consecutive game period. For example, the specific measurement number is the total number of prize balls in all game states, the total number of prize balls limited to a certain game state such as a jackpot game state, or the total number of prize balls limited to a certain period such as a consecutive game period. It's okay to have one. Further, for example, the specific measurement number may be based on all gaming states, limited to a certain gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state, or limited to a certain period such as a consecutive game period.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine PY1 is configured as a non-enclosed type pachinko in which game balls housed inside flow down the game area 6 and then are discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine PY1. However, the pachinko game machine may be configured as an enclosed pachinko machine in which game balls housed inside the machine can circulate and enter the game area again after flowing down the game area. In this case, a 7-segment display is arranged on a frame control board corresponding to the payout control board 170. Therefore, it may be possible to display the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) on this 7-segment display. There is also a 6-digit, 7-segment display at the bottom of the front door that displays the number of balls you have. Therefore, the number of difference balls (specific measurement number) may be displayed on this 6-digit 7-segment display. Note that "measurement" in this embodiment has the same meaning as counting or counting.

In the above form, the over-prize ball prevention function is based on the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls after the information on the number of difference balls stored in the difference ball number storage unit 107c has been cleared (i.e., non-erasing clear processing). It has been explained that the operation is performed based on the difference in the number of balls, which is the difference between the number of balls and the number of balls, being equal to or more than a predetermined reference number. However, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated in response to the value measured as the maximum number of differential balls (sometimes referred to as the maximum number of balls held, MY, etc.) reaching a predetermined reference number. In other words, the specific measurement number may be the maximum difference number of balls. Here, the maximum difference in the number of balls will be explained with reference to FIG. FIGS. 95A to 95C each show an example of the change in the number of difference balls and an example of the maximum number of difference balls calculated according to the change in the number of difference balls.

FIG. 95(A) is an example in which after the first minimum difference ball number is recorded, the difference ball number changes without being updated. The minimum number of difference balls is the lowest value of the measured number of difference balls. Specifically, in FIG. 95(A), after the previous non-erasure clearing process was performed, the number of difference balls has been decreasing, and the lowest number of difference balls "-10000" is recorded at time tA1. There is. After that, although the number of difference balls increases and decreases, it does not decrease below the minimum number of difference balls at time tA1 and remains unchanged. Then, at time tA2, which is after time tA1, a peak of "70,000" in the number of balls is recorded. The peak of the number of difference balls is the highest value of the number of difference balls after the minimum number of difference balls is measured. The maximum number of differential balls MYA in the example of FIG. 95(A) is "80,000" which is the difference between the minimum number of differential balls "-10000" at time tA1 and the peak number of differential balls "70,000" at time tA2. .

In the example of FIG. 95(A), the minimum number of differential balls is updated multiple times in accordance with the decrease in the number of differential balls until time tA1, because the number of differential balls tends to decrease. However, after that, the minimum difference number of balls does not fall below the minimum difference ball number at time tA1, so the minimum difference ball number is not updated after time tA1.

FIG. 95(B) is an example in which the minimum number of difference balls is updated multiple times and the number of difference balls changes. In this example, after the previous non-erasure clearing process was performed, the first minimum difference ball number "-10000" is recorded at time tB1. Furthermore, at time tB4, the lowest number of difference balls "-20000" is recorded, which is smaller than the number of difference balls "-10000" at time tB1. Further, at time tB7, the lowest number of difference balls "-30000" which is smaller than the number of difference balls at time tB4 is recorded. Then, in the period from time tB1 to time tB4 in FIG. 95(B), a peak of "20000" in the number of differential balls is recorded at time tB2. Further, from time tB4 to time tB7, a peak of "0" in the number of differential balls is recorded at time tB5. Furthermore, at time tB8, which is after time tB7, a peak of "50,000" in the number of balls is recorded. The maximum number of difference balls MYB in the example of FIG. 95(B) is "80000", which is the difference between the minimum number of difference balls "-30000" at time tB7 and the peak number of difference balls "50000" at time tB8. .

In addition, also in the example of FIG. 95(B), the minimum number of differential balls is updated multiple times in accordance with the decrease in the number of differential balls until time tB1, because the number of differential balls tends to decrease. In addition, the minimum number of difference balls is smaller than the number of difference balls at time tB1, which is the previous minimum number of difference balls, between time tB3 and time tB4, and is on a decreasing trend. It has been updated multiple times as the number of differential balls decreases. Furthermore, the minimum number of difference balls is smaller than the number of difference balls at time tB4 which is the previous minimum number of difference balls between time tB6 and time tB7, and is on a decreasing trend. It has been updated multiple times as the number of differential balls decreases.

FIG. 95(C) is an example in which the difference in the number of balls changes to a negative value. In this example, after the previous non-erasure clearing process was performed, the first minimum difference ball number "-30000" is recorded at time tC1. Furthermore, at time tC4, the minimum number of difference balls "-50000" is recorded, which is smaller than the minimum number of difference balls "-30000" at time tC1. Then, in the period from time tC1 to time tC4 in FIG. 95(C), a peak of "-10000" in the number of differential balls is recorded at time tC2. Further, at time tC5, which is after time tC4, a peak of "-10000" in the number of balls is recorded. In the example of FIG. 95(C), the maximum number of difference balls MYC is "40000" which is the difference between the minimum number of difference balls "-50000" at time tC4 and the peak number of difference balls "-10000" at time tC5. be.

In addition, also in the example of FIG.95(C), since the number of difference balls tends to decrease until time tC1, the minimum number of difference balls is updated multiple times according to the decrease in the number of difference balls. In addition, the minimum number of difference balls is smaller than the number of difference balls at time tC1, which is the previous minimum number of difference balls, between time tC3 and time tC4, and is on a decreasing trend. It has been updated multiple times as the number of differential balls decreases.

As mentioned above, the maximum number of difference balls is determined by the difference between the minimum number of difference balls, which is the lowest value of the number of difference balls measured, and the peak (highest value) of the number of difference balls after the minimum number of difference balls is measured. Calculated. The over-winning ball prevention function can be activated when the difference between the minimum number of difference balls and the number of difference balls measured after the minimum number of difference balls is recorded reaches a predetermined reference number. can. In other words, the over-prize ball prevention function can be activated in response to the increase in the number of difference balls from the minimum number of difference balls reaching a predetermined reference number. Further, the over-winning ball prevention function can be activated in response to the maximum difference ball number reaching a predetermined reference number.

Specifically, for example, the over-prize ball prevention function stores the minimum number of difference balls in a predetermined storage area and calculates the difference between the stored minimum number of difference balls and the current (latest) number of difference balls. At the same time, it is conceivable to operate in response to the calculated value reaching a predetermined reference number. Information on the minimum number of difference balls and information on the calculated value of the difference between the minimum number of difference balls and the current number of difference balls can be stored in a predetermined storage area (non-erasable storage unit 107) of the gaming RAM 104. good. These values may be cleared (that is, set to initial values) when the difference in the number of balls is cleared in a predetermined non-erasing clearing process.

In addition, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated in response to the difference between the minimum difference ball number and the difference ball number measured after the minimum difference ball number is recorded reaching a predetermined reference number, That is, when the number of increases in the number of difference balls from the minimum number of difference balls is set as the specific measurement number, a counter may be provided to count the specific measurement number. Such a counter may, for example, always perform addition based on the number of prize balls regardless of the value, and perform subtraction based on the number of fired balls when the number is greater than "0". If the difference in the number of balls is "0" or less, no subtraction is performed based on the number of fired balls. The value of such a counter changes as an integer greater than or equal to "0". This counter may hereinafter be referred to as a difference ball natural number counter. Information on the difference ball natural number counter may also be stored in a predetermined storage area (non-erasable storage section 107) of the gaming RAM 104. Then, the value of the difference ball natural number counter is cleared (that is, set to the initial value) by a process equivalent to a predetermined non-erasure clearing process (processing that clears the difference ball number in the above embodiment). Bye.

An example of the change in the value of the difference ball natural number counter will be explained with reference to FIG. 96. FIGS. 96(A) to 96(C) each show the change in the value of the difference ball natural number counter. The changes in the value of the difference ball natural number counter shown in FIGS. 96(A) to 96(C) respectively correspond to the changes in the number of difference balls shown in FIGS. 95(A) to 95(C).

As shown in FIGS. 96(A) to 96(C), the value of the difference ball natural number counter becomes "0" while the minimum difference ball number is updated. The difference ball natural number counter can count the increase in the number of difference balls from the minimum difference ball number using a natural number. Therefore, by using the difference ball natural number counter, it is possible to properly function the over-prize ball prevention function. Furthermore, with the difference ball natural number counter that always changes at "0" or more, it is possible to calculate in an easy-to-understand manner the minimum value required for the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function. Moreover, when using a value less than "0", the amount of information related to calculation by the game control microcomputer 101 may increase. In such a case, the load on the game control microcomputer 101 can be reduced by using a difference ball natural number counter that always changes at "0" or more.

In the above form, if the number of difference balls reaches 80,000 in a game state other than the jackpot game state, and if it reaches 80,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state ends. This corresponded to "predetermined conditions, including exceeding a predetermined standard number." However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, the number of difference balls reaching 80,000 in a game state other than the jackpot game state in the above form may correspond to "a predetermined condition including that the specific measured number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number" . In addition, for example, the number of difference balls reaches 80,000 in a state other than a small winning game or a jackpot playing state, that if the number of balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of a jackpot playing state, that jackpot playing state ends, or during a small winning playing state. If the number reaches 80,000, the small winning game ends, which may correspond to "a predetermined condition including that the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number". In addition, for example, if the number of differential balls reaches 80,000 in a state other than a small winning game or a jackpot playing state (type 1 jackpot playing state, type 2 jackpot playing state), or if the number of difference balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of a type 1 jackpot playing state, means that the first type jackpot game state ends, if the number reaches 80,000 in the middle of the small winning game, the small winning game ends, and if it reaches 80,000 in the middle of the second type jackpot game state, that The second type jackpot game state ends, and if the second type jackpot game state is executed when the number reaches 80,000 in the middle of a small winning game, the second type jackpot game state ends. This may correspond to a "predetermined condition including that the number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number."

In the above form, the super prize ball advance suggestion performance (see FIGS. 31(C) and 31(D)) in which one performance symbol EZ is definitely stopped and displayed in a special symbol mode on the display screen 50a is It was equivalent to "suggestive performance." However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a "jackpot" and it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current difference number of balls is 80,000 or more, If the effect suggests in advance that the prize ball prevention function will be activated, a specific effect image (for example, a specific effect image, a specific hold icon HA) is displayed on the display screen 50a, or a specific effect is displayed from the speaker 52. An effect such as outputting a sound or causing the frame lamp 53 or the panel lamp 54 to emit light in a specific light emission mode may correspond to the "preliminary suggestion effect."

In the over-prize ball advance suggestion performance of the above form, the number of performance symbols EZ in the special symbol mode that are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a is one (FIG. 31(C), FIG. 31(D)) reference). However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, as the special figure-related random number caused by the execution of the over-prize ball advance suggestion effect is cleared from the special figure reservation storage unit 105, and the opportunity to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot in the special figure determination process approaches. , the number of performance symbols EZ in the special symbol mode that are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a in the over-prize ball advance suggestion performance may be increased. Thereby, it becomes possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the activation of the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is gradually approaching.

The above-mentioned jackpot game corresponded to a "special game." However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, a small winning game may correspond to a "special game." Moreover, the jackpot game and the small win game may correspond to a "special game."

Step S4403 in the start winning process (S4302) of the above form corresponded to the "specific determination means". However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, in the sensor detection process (S104), the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the look-ahead determination is "jackpot" and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed is set to the current number of difference balls. The process of determining whether the added value is 80,000 or more may correspond to the "specific determination means."

The result of the look-ahead determination in step S4403 in the above-mentioned starting winning process (S4302) is "jackpot", and the value is the sum of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls. If it was determined that the number was 80,000 or more, an over-prize ball advance suggestion performance was executed. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, even if the result of the look-ahead determination in step S4403 in the start-up winning process (S4302) is "lose", the super-prize ball advance suggestion performance may be executed as a fake performance. In addition, for example, in step S4403 of the starting winning process (S4302), the result of the pre-read determination is "jackpot", and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed is added to the current number of difference balls. Even if it is determined that the value is 80,000 or more, the over-prize ball advance suggestion performance may not be executed.

The result of the look-ahead determination in step S4403 in the above-mentioned starting winning process (S4302) is "jackpot", and the value is the sum of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls. is determined to be less than 80,000, the over-prize ball advance suggestion performance was not executed. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, if the result of the look-ahead determination in step S4403 in the starting winning process (S4302) is "jackpot", the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls is If it is determined that the number is less than 80,000, a lottery is held to carry out the over-prized ball advance suggestion (for example, winning with a probability of 1/5), and if the lottery result is a win, the over-prized ball advance suggestion performance is performed. Suggestive performance may also be performed.

The result of the look-ahead determination in step S4403 in the above-mentioned starting winning process (S4302) is "jackpot", and the value is the sum of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls. When it was determined that the number was 80,000 or more, the over-prize ball advance suggestion performance was always executed. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, if the result of the look-ahead determination in step S4403 in the starting winning process (S4302) is "jackpot", the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls is If it is determined that the number is 80,000 or more, a lottery is held to execute the over-prized ball advance suggestion (for example, winning with a probability of 1/5), and if the lottery result is a win, the over-prized ball advance suggestion is performed. A performance may also be performed.

The special pattern mode in which the part showing the numbers (number part) and the part showing the angel character in the above form were combined corresponded to the "special pattern mode." However, there is no need to be limited to this. If the result of the look-ahead determination is a "jackpot" and it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls is 80,000 or more, the over-prize ball Any other pattern may be used as long as it indicates in advance that the prevention function will be activated. Specifically, for example, it is determined that the result of the look-ahead determination is a "jackpot" and the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls is 80,000 or more. In this case, a production pattern EZ of a special pattern (for example, a star) may be stopped and displayed.

In the above embodiment, the special pattern related random number caused by the execution of the over-prized ball advance suggestion performance is cleared from the special pattern reservation storage unit 105, and the special pattern is determined based on the result of determining whether or not it will be a jackpot in the special pattern determination process. In the figure fluctuation performance, an over-prize ball preview performance suggesting that the over-prize ball prevention function will be activated after the end of the scheduled jackpot game was executed (see FIG. 31(F)). The over-prized ball preview performance was equivalent to a ``control suggestion performance.'' However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, if the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" and it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current difference number of balls is 80,000 or more, If the effect suggests that the ball prevention function will be activated, a specific effect image (for example, a specific effect image, a specific icon TA) is displayed on the display screen 50a, or a specific sound is emitted from the speaker 52. An effect that is output or causes the frame lamp 53 or board lamp 54 to emit light in a specific light emission mode may correspond to a "control suggestion effect."

In the over-prize ball preview performance of the above-mentioned form, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the special symbol mode are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then definitely stopped and displayed. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, after the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the normal symbol mode are temporarily stopped and displayed, the super prize ball preview performance is executed and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the special symbol mode are definitively stopped and displayed. Also good. Further, for example, in the over-prize ball preview performance, a dedicated symbol different from the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 may be stopped and displayed.

In the above embodiment, the game result image YZ including the total number of shots SH, the total number of wins image SK, and the total number of prizes won image SN displayed on the display screen 50a corresponds to the "specific display". However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, at least one of the four display images included in the game result image YZ (total number of prizes won image SN, total number of shots image SH, total number of wins image SK, and differential number of balls reached image KN) is " It may correspond to "specific display". Further, for example, the acquired prize pitch number image HD and the total acquired prize pitch number HS may correspond to the "specific display". Further, for example, the difference ball number image SD and the total difference ball number image SS may correspond to the "specific display". In addition, for example, the acquired ball icon video HG and the total acquired ball number image HH may correspond to the "specific display."

In the above embodiment, the timing at which the game result image YZ is displayed on the display screen 50a is after the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, the timing at which the game result image YZ is displayed on the display screen 50a may be immediately before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. Specifically, for example, the number of difference balls may be a predetermined number (for example, 79999). Also, for example, if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more during a winning game (big winning game, small winning game), and immediately before the execution of the winning game (big winning game, small winning game) ends (for example, a 10R jackpot game) If so, it may be at the end of the 10th round game or during the ending of a jackpot game). In addition, for example, the timing at which the game result image YZ is displayed on the display screen 50a may be just before the end of the rush state (consecutive game period). In the present invention, "the case where the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the game control means" includes the case immediately before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the case where the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. It may be .

In the game result image YZ of the above form, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the general winning opening 10, the first The total number of winnings image SN that suggests information on the total number of game balls won in the grand prize opening 14 and the second grand prize opening 15, and the player's steering wheel before the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. 72k, the total number of shot images SH suggesting information on the total number of game balls fired from the firing device 72 and reaching the game area 6, and the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function are activated. A total acquired number image SK indicating information on the total number of prize balls acquired by the player was included. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, the game result image YZ may include only one of the total number of winnings image SN, the total number of shots fired image SH, or the total number of wins image SK. Furthermore, for example, the game result image YZ may include two types of display images among the total winning number image SN, the total number of shots fired image SH, or the total number of winning images SK.

The game result image YZ of the above format included a difference ball number reaching image KN that indicates to the player that the difference ball number has reached 80,000. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, the game result image YZ does not need to include the difference ball number reaching image KN that indicates to the player that the difference ball number has reached 80,000.

In the above embodiment, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function was activated, the game result image YZ was displayed on the display screen 50a. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine PY1 that can set any one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the setting value will be set. A display image suggesting information about the setting value may be displayed. For example, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, the first big prize opening 14 and the second big prize opening 15 are operated until the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is controlled to be unexecutable. , the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, etc., a display image suggesting information on the number of winnings to each winning hole may be displayed. Also, for example, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, information on the total number of times the jackpot game is executed until the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is controlled to be impossible to execute. A display image suggesting this may be displayed. For example, when the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated, a display image that suggests information on the total number of first wins until the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is controlled to be impossible to execute is displayed. It may be displayed.

In the first modified example, the settings include whether to display the total number of shots SH, the settings whether to display the total number of wins image SK, and the settings whether to display the total number of prizes won image SN. was possible. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, any one of the settings of whether to display the total number of shots SH, the setting of whether or not to display the total number of wins image SK, or the setting of whether or not to display the total number of winnings image SN. It may be a configuration in which settings cannot be made.

The game result image YZ in the above format shows game balls that have been fired from the firing device 72 and reached the gaming area 6 by the player operating the handle 72k before the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated. A total number of shots SH image that suggests information on the total number of shots was included. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, the total shot number image SH shows game balls that were fired from the firing device 72 and reached the gaming area 6 by the player operating the handle 72k before the over-prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated; It may be a display image that suggests information on the total number of game balls that were fired from the firing device 72 and did not reach the game area 6.

The first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, the first big winning hole 14, the second big winning hole 15, and the general winning hole 10 of the above configuration corresponded to the "winning hole". However, the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, the first big winning hole 14, the second big winning hole 15, and the general winning hole 10 do not need to correspond to the "winning hole." For example, any winning opening among the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the first big winning opening 14, the second big winning opening 15, or the general winning opening 10 corresponds to the "winning opening". It's okay. Also, for example, two or more types of winning holes among the first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15, or general winning hole 10 are "winning holes". It may be equivalent to

The total number of winnings image SK in the above form is the total number of prize balls (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, general winning opening 10) that the player has acquired before the over-winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated. , the first grand prize opening 14, or the second grand prize opening 15, the total number of prize balls that were won and awarded to each winning hole) was a display image suggesting information. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, the total number of winnings image SK is a display image that suggests information about the total number of prize balls that have been won and awarded to each of the first grand prize opening 14 or the second grand prize opening 15. The display image may also be a display image that does not include information on the number of prize balls awarded by winning in the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, and the general winning hole 10.

The total number of winnings image SN in the above form is the first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, general winning opening 10, and first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, general winning opening 10, and It was a display image suggesting information on the total number of game balls won in the grand prize opening 14 and the second grand prize opening 15. However, the total number of winnings image SN is the total number of game balls won in the first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15, and general winning hole 10. The display image does not need to be informative. For example, the total number of winnings image SN does not include information on the total number of game balls won in the first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, and general winning hole 10, and does not include information on the total number of game balls won in the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, and the general winning hole 10. It may be a display image that suggests information on the total number of game balls won in the two major winning holes 15.

Step S3110 and step S3112 in the sensor detection process (S104) of the fifth modification corresponded to the "predetermined determination means". However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, step S1509 of the special pattern jackpot determination process (special pattern 2 jackpot determination process (S1402), special pattern jackpot determination process (S1408)) of the sixth modification may correspond to the "predetermined determination means". Further, for example, step S4408 of the starting winning process (S4302) of the seventh modification may correspond to the "predetermined determination means".

The icon preview change performance, which is the look-ahead performance in the fifth modification, the sixth modification, and the seventh modification, corresponded to the "suggestion performance." However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, a specific effect image is displayed on the display screen 50a, a specific sound is output from the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are caused to emit light in a specific lighting mode, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, etc. , a prefetch effect in which a preview using an effect image is displayed may correspond to a "suggestive effect."

In the fifth modification example and the seventh modification example, the result of the look-ahead determination is "jackpot", and the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls is If it is determined that the number is 80,000 or more, the prefetch effect is not executed. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, if the result of the pre-reading judgment is a "jackpot" and it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current difference number of balls is 80,000 or more, the pre-reading judgment A lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the performance (for example, 1/5 probability of winning), and if the lottery result is a win, a pre-reading performance is performed, but if the result is a loss, a pre-reading performance is performed. A configuration in which no performance is performed may be used.

In the sixth modified example, the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot", and it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls is 80,000 or more. In this case, the prefetch effect was not executed. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, if the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" and it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current difference number of balls is 80,000 or more, A lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform the performance (for example, 1/5 probability of winning), and if the lottery result is a win, a pre-reading performance is performed, but if the result is a loss, a pre-reading performance is performed. The configuration may be such that no performance is performed.

In the above fifth modification example and the above seventh modification example, the result of the look-ahead determination is "jackpot", and the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls is If it is determined that the number is 80,000 or more, the prefetch determination is not performed. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a "jackpot" and it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current difference number of balls is 80,000 or more, the look-ahead judgment A lottery is held to determine whether or not to make a decision (for example, winning with a probability of 1/5), and if the lottery result is a win, a pre-read judgment is made, but if the result is a loss, a pre-read judgment is made. The configuration may be such that it is not performed.

In the sixth variation, the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot", and it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current number of difference balls is 80,000 or more. In this case, the configuration was such that no look-ahead determination was performed. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, if the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" and it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game scheduled to be executed to the current difference number of balls is 80,000 or more, A lottery is held to determine whether or not to make a decision (for example, 1/5 probability of winning), and if the lottery result is a win, a pre-read judgment is made, but if the result is a loss, a pre-read judgment is made. The configuration may be such that it is not performed.

In the eighth modification, regardless of the current number of difference balls, even if a game ball is detected by the second big prize opening sensor 15a, the prize ball is not paid out, but when a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a. The prize ball was paid out. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, if the current number of difference balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 70,000), when a game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a, the prize ball is paid out, but the game ball is paid out by the specific area sensor 16a. A configuration may also be adopted in which the prize ball is not paid out even if a ball is detected. In this case, if the current number of difference balls is a predetermined number (for example, 70,000) or more, even if a game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a, the prize ball is not paid out and the specific area sensor 16a A configuration may be adopted in which a prize ball is paid out when a game ball is detected.

In the eighth modified example, regardless of the current number of difference balls, even if a game ball is detected by the second big prize opening sensor 15a, the prize ball is not paid out, and the game ball is detected by the non-specific area sensor 17a. And the prize ball was paid out. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, if the current number of differential balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 70,000), a prize ball will be paid out when a game ball is detected by the second large winning hole sensor 15a, but a prize ball will be paid out by the non-specific area sensor 17a. The configuration may be such that the prize ball is not paid out even if a game ball is detected. In this case, if the current number of difference balls is a predetermined number (for example, 70,000) or more, even if a game ball is detected by the second large winning hole sensor 15a, the prize ball is not paid out and the non-specific area sensor 17a A configuration may be adopted in which a prize ball is paid out when a game ball is detected by.

In the eighth modified example, when the difference number of balls becomes 80,000 or more when the game is not in the middle of a small winning game or a jackpot game, the excessive winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is controlled to be disabled, and the small winning ball abnormality prevention function is activated. If the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000 or more during a winning game, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function will be activated at the timing when the execution of the small winning game ends, and the game will be disabled. If the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more during a jackpot game (jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game), the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated at the timing when the execution of the jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game) is finished. In some cases, the game was uncontrollably controlled. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, if the difference in number of balls becomes 80,000 or more when you are not in the middle of a small winning game or a jackpot game, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is controlled to be impossible, and when you are not in the middle of a small winning game. When the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated at the timing when the execution of the small winning game ends, and the game is controlled to be impossible. If the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000 or more during a jackpot game (jackpot game), the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated at the timing when the execution of the jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game) is completed, and the game becomes impossible. If the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more between when the game is controlled and when it is in the time-saving state, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated at the timing when the state is shifted to the non-time-saving state, and the game is controlled to be impossible. There may be.

In the eighth modified example, although it is rare that the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 15 passes through the non-specific area 17, the game ball that passes through the non-specific area 17 is ejected from the discharge port. The configuration was as follows. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, no matter what winning timing a game ball enters the second big prize opening 15, by allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 16, a small hit is essentially treated as a jackpot. In the case of a functioning configuration, since game balls almost never pass through the non-specific area 17, a configuration may not be provided that does not provide a discharge port through which game balls that have passed through the non-specific area 17 are discharged. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101 is configured to first perform the V validity period setting process (S2706) before performing the difference ball number measurement process (S106) based on the detection by the second big prize opening sensor 15a. It is preferable that As a result, no matter what winning timing the game ball enters the second big prize opening 15, the game ball can pass through the specific area 16, so that a small hit is essentially a jackpot. Even if the pachinko game machine is configured to function as a pachinko machine, even though the game ball that entered the second big prize opening 15 passed through the specific area 16, the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game becomes unplayable. This makes it possible to prevent the second type jackpot game from being executed due to being controlled.

In the ninth modification, the difference ball number suggestion image SB (first difference ball number suggestion image SB1, second difference ball number suggestion image SB2, third difference ball number suggestion image SB3, fourth difference ball number suggestion image SB3, fourth difference ball number suggestion image SB3, The over-prize ball abnormality suggestion performance in which the number suggestion image SB4 and the fifth difference ball number suggestion image SB5) are displayed corresponded to the "control suggestion production". However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, if the effect suggests the possibility that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is uncontrollably controlled, for example, a specific effect image may be displayed on the display screen 50a, or a specific sound may be heard from the speaker 52. A production in which a sound is output, a frame lamp 53 or a board lamp 54 is made to emit light in a specific lighting mode, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc. is displayed is a "control suggestion production". It may be equivalent to

In the ninth modification, the effect that makes it appear as if the prize ball addition image NS ("+15") displayed on the display screen 50a has been absorbed into the difference ball number suggestion image SB is changed to the "addition notification effect". It was equivalent. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, if it is an effect indicating that the number of difference balls has been added, for example, a specific effect image is displayed on the display screen 50a, a specific sound is output from the speaker 52, or the frame lamp 53 or board lamp 54 An effect in which the light is emitted in a specific light emission mode, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc. is displayed may correspond to the "additional notification effect".

In the above-mentioned ninth modification, the production mode of the over-prize ball abnormality suggestion production in which the first difference number of balls suggestion image SB1 is displayed corresponds to the "first production mode", and the second difference number of balls suggestion image SB2 is displayed. The production mode of the over-prize ball abnormality suggestion production corresponded to the "second production mode". However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, the production mode of the over-prize ball abnormality suggestion performance in which the first difference ball number suggestion image SB1 is displayed, the production mode of the over-prize ball abnormality suggestion performance in which the second difference ball number suggestion image SB2 is displayed, the third difference ball number suggestion image SB1, etc. Which difference ball number suggestion image is the production mode of the over-prize ball abnormality suggestion performance in which the number suggestion image SB3 is displayed, or the production mode of the over-prize ball abnormality suggestion performance in which the fourth difference ball number suggestion image SB4 is displayed. The performance mode of the over-prized ball abnormality suggestion performance in which SB is displayed corresponds to the "first performance mode", and the over-prized ball abnormality prevention function is activated than the performance mode of the over-prized ball abnormality suggestion performance, and the game is played. The presentation mode of the over-prized ball abnormality suggestion presentation that suggests that there is a high possibility that the ball will be controlled in an impossible manner may correspond to the "second presentation mode."

In the above-mentioned ninth modification, the types of performance modes of the over-prized ball abnormality suggestion performance are the performance mode of the over-prized ball abnormality suggestion performance in which the first difference ball number suggestion image SB1 is displayed, and the second difference ball number suggestion image. A presentation mode of an over-prized ball abnormality suggestion performance in which SB2 is displayed, a presentation mode of an over-prized ball abnormality suggestion performance in which a third difference number of balls suggestion image SB3 is displayed, and a presentation mode of an over-prized ball abnormality suggestion performance in which a fourth difference number of balls suggestion image SB4 is displayed. There were five types of performance modes: an over-prized ball abnormality suggesting performance in which a fifth difference ball number suggestion image SB5 is displayed, and an over-prized ball abnormality suggesting performance in which a fifth difference ball number suggestion image SB5 is displayed. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, the number of types of performance modes of the over-prized ball abnormality suggestion performance may be four or less, or six or more.

In the ninth modified example, when the difference number of balls reaches a specified number (for example, 70,000), an over-prize ball abnormality suggestion effect is executed, and a difference ball number suggestion image SB is displayed on the display screen 50a. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, the specified number may be less than 70,000 or may be 70,001 or more.

In the ninth modification, each time the number of difference balls increases by 2001 from 70,000, the number of difference balls suggestion image SB displayed on the display screen 50a is changed to another number of difference balls suggestion image SB. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, each time the difference number of balls increases from 70000 to a value smaller than 2001, the difference ball number suggestion image SB displayed on the display screen 50a may be changed to another difference ball number suggestion image SB. Also, for example, each time the number of difference balls increases from 70,000 to 2001, the number of difference balls suggestion image SB displayed on the display screen 50a is changed to another number of difference balls suggestion image SB. Also good.

In the ninth modification, the change from the first difference ball number suggestion image SB1 displayed on the display screen 50a to the second difference ball number suggestion image SB2 is that the difference ball number reaches 72,001. Note that the difference in the number of balls of 72001 in the ninth modification corresponded to the "predetermined number". However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, any value among the number of difference balls 72001, the number of difference balls 74001, the number of difference balls 76001, or the number of difference balls 78001 may correspond to the "predetermined number".

In the ninth modification, the difference ball number suggestion image SB displayed on the display screen 50a was always changed to another difference ball number suggestion image SB every time the difference ball number increased by 2001 from 70000. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, each time the number of difference balls increases by 2001 from 70,000, a change lottery is performed to determine whether or not the difference number of balls suggestion image SB displayed on the display screen 50a changes to another difference number of balls suggestion image SB. Depending on the lottery result, the difference ball number suggestion image SB displayed on the display screen 50a changes to another difference ball number suggestion image SB, and the difference ball number suggestion image displayed on the display screen 50a. There may be cases where the image does not change from SB to another difference ball number suggestion image SB.

In the ninth modification, the operation notification effect in which the operation notification image HB is displayed on the display screen 50a corresponds to the "control notification effect." However, there is no need to be limited to this. If it is an effect indicating that the excessive prize ball abnormality prevention function is activated and the game is uncontrollably controlled, for example, a specific effect image is displayed on the display screen 50a, or a specific sound is output from the speaker 52. A production that displays a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc., which causes the frame lamp 53 or the board lamp 54 to emit light in a specific light emission mode, corresponds to a "control notification production". Also good.

In the ninth modified example, the prize pitch number notification effect in which the prize pitch number notification image G201 is displayed corresponds to the "prize pitch number presentation." However, there is no need to be limited to this. If it is a performance that shows the number of prize balls won by winning in the second big prize opening 15 during a high-accuracy non-time saving state (small hit rush state), for example, a performance in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display screen 50a. , an effect in which a specific sound is output from the speaker 52, etc. may correspond to the "prize ball count effect".

In the ninth modification, the prize ball number notification image G201 is a performance image that shows the number of prize balls won by winning in the second grand prize opening 15 during a high-accuracy, non-time-saving state (small hit rush state). . However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, the prize ball number notification image G201 shows the number of prize balls won by winning in the second start opening 12 and the number of prize balls won by winning in the general prize opening 10 during a high-accuracy non-time saving state (small winning rush state). It may be an effect image that shows the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls obtained by winning into the second grand prize opening 15.

In the ninth modification, the prize ball number notification image G201 is a performance image that shows the number of prize balls won by winning in the second grand prize opening 15 during a high-accuracy, non-time-saving state (small hit rush state). . However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, it is possible to display the prize ball number notification image G201 on the display screen 50a even during the jackpot game state, and in this case, the prize ball number notification image G201 is displayed in the first big prize opening 14 or A display that shows the total number of game balls won by winning in the second big prize opening 15 and the number of prize balls won by winning in the second big prize opening 15 during a high probability non-time saving state (small winning rush state) It may be an image.

In the above-mentioned 9th modification, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery, the "jackpot symbol D" is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern, and after the executed jackpot game ends, or you win the jackpot in the special drawing 2 drawing. After winning, the "jackpot symbol F" is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, and the executed jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a high-precision non-time-saving state. However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, and after the executed jackpot game ends, it is controlled to a high-accuracy time-saving state, and the number of changes of the special symbol in the high-accuracy time-saving state is a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). If it exceeds , it may be controlled to a high-reliability non-time-saving state. Also, for example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, and after the executed jackpot game ends, it is controlled to a high-accuracy time-saving state, and in that high-accuracy time-saving state, the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small-win symbol. When the number of times exceeds a specific number (for example, 10 times), control may be performed to a highly accurate non-time saving state.

The highly accurate non-time saving state of the ninth modification corresponded to the "specific gaming state". However, there is no need to be limited to this. For example, the low probability time saving state may correspond to a "specific gaming state". Further, for example, the highly accurate time saving state may correspond to a "specific gaming state".

12. Inventions Shown in the Above Embodiments In the above embodiments, inventions of the following means are shown. In the explanation of the means described below, the corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, and the symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means A>
The invention related to means A1 is:
Ball entry ports (first starting port 11, second starting port 12) distributed in a gaming area (gaming area 6) where game balls can flow down;
A special winning hole (second big winning hole 15) distributed in the gaming area, a special winning hole detection means (second big winning hole sensor 15a) that detects winning in the special winning hole, and a special winning hole detecting means (second big winning hole sensor 15a) that detects winning in the special winning hole A special winning device (second prize winning device 15D) having a specific area detecting means (specific area sensor 16a) for detecting passage of a game ball to a specific area (specific area 16) arranged downstream of the mouth detecting means. and,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that makes a judgment based on the entry of the ball into the ball entry hole,
The game control means is
If the result of the judgment is a small win, a small win game that opens the special prize opening can be executed;
When the game ball that has entered the special winning hole passes through the specific area, a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed;
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference ball number) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
A predetermined condition including that the specific measured number becomes a predetermined reference number (for example, 80,000) or more (the number of difference balls reaches 80,000 in a game state other than a jackpot game state and a small win game, a jackpot game ( 1st type jackpot game, 2nd type jackpot game) If the number reaches 80,000 in the middle of the state, that jackpot game state will end, and if it reaches 80,000 in the middle of a small winning game, that small winning game will end. control the game so that it cannot be executed if
A prize ball is not awarded even if detected by the special winning opening detection means, but a prize ball is awarded when detected by the specific area detection means. It is a gaming machine that

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player, and also awards prize balls even if detected by the special winning opening detection means in a small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific measurement number from exceeding the reference number before being detected by the specific area detection means. This makes it possible to avoid a disadvantage to the player in which the game is controlled to be impossible to execute and a jackpot game based on the passage of a game ball to a specific area is not executed.

The invention related to means A2 is
In the gaming machine according to means A1,
The special prize winning means is
It has a non-specific area detection means (non-specific area sensor 17a) that detects passage of a game ball to a non-specific area (non-specific area 17) arranged downstream of the special winning opening detection means,
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured such that a prize ball can be awarded when the passage of a game ball is detected by the non-specific area detection means.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, even if the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number, a prize ball is not awarded even if it is detected by the special winning hole detection means in a small winning game, but it is detected by the non-specific area detection means. Since the player is given a prize ball, it is possible to avoid winning a prize in the special prize opening and not receiving a prize ball.

The invention related to means A3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means A2,
When the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number and execution of the small winning game is completed, the game may be controlled to be impossible to execute by the game control means,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number and execution of the jackpot game is finished, the game may be controlled to be impossible to execute by the game control means. be.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when a game ball is detected by the specific area detection means and a prize ball is awarded, even if the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number, a jackpot game based on passing to the specific area The game is not controlled to be unplayable until the execution of the game ends. On the other hand, when a game ball is detected by the non-specific area detection means and a prize ball is awarded, even if the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number, the game will continue until the execution of the small winning game ends. not be uncontrollably controlled. Thereby, even if the specific measured number is greater than or equal to the reference number, it is possible to appropriately provide the player with a jackpot game or a small win game.

<Means B>
The invention related to means B1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) that executes a predetermined display,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference ball number) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
A predetermined condition including that the specific measured number becomes a predetermined reference number (80,000) or more (the number of difference balls reaches 80,000 in a game state other than the jackpot game state, and reaches 80,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state) control the game so that it cannot be executed,
The performance control means is
When the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the game control means, a specific display (game result image YZ (total winnings image SN, total number of shots image SH, total This is a gaming machine characterized by being able to execute the acquired number image SK (see FIG. 33(B))).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, if a predetermined condition including that the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference value is established and the game is controlled to be impossible to execute, the game is A specific display is performed suggesting information regarding the results of playing at the machine. This not only makes it possible to provide the player with a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls, but also allows the player to check the game results on the gaming machine using a specific display. Therefore, based on the information regarding the gaming results on the gaming machine, it is possible to provide an opportunity for the player to play games on the gaming machine in the future.

The invention related to means B2 is:
In the gaming machine according to means B1,
Equipped with a firing device (launching device 72) capable of firing a game ball toward a gaming area (gaming area 6),
The specific indication is
This is a display suggesting information regarding the total number of game balls that have reached the game area until the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the game control means (total number of shots SH, see FIG. 33(B)). This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the total number of gaming balls that have reached the gaming area until a predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined period and the gaming machine is controlled to be impossible to execute is displayed using a specific display. It becomes possible to confirm. As a result, based on the total number of game balls that have reached the gaming area before the game on the game machine becomes impossible to play, it is possible to provide an opportunity for the player to continue playing on the game machine in the future. It becomes possible.

The invention related to means B3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means B1,
The gaming machine has winning holes (first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15, general winning hole 10) provided on the game board (gaming board 1). It is configured such that a predetermined number of prize balls can be awarded by placing a game ball in a prize.
The specific indication is
The display suggests information regarding the total number of prize balls that the player has acquired before the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the game control means (total number of prize balls acquired image SK, see FIG. 33(B)). This is a gaming machine with special features.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the specific display makes it possible for the player to confirm information regarding the total number of prize balls that the player has won before the game on the gaming machine is controlled to become unplayable. As a result, based on the information regarding the total number of prize balls that the player has won before the game on the game machine becomes impossible to play, it provides an opportunity for the player to continue playing on the game machine in the future. becomes possible.

The invention related to means B4 is:
In the gaming machine according to means B1,
The gaming machine has winning holes (first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15, general winning hole 10) provided on the game board (gaming board 1). It is configured such that a predetermined number of prize balls can be awarded by placing a game ball in a prize.
The specific indication is
This is a display that suggests information regarding the total number of times a game ball is won in the entered prize hole until the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the game control means (total number of prizes won image SN, see FIG. 33(B)). This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, it is possible to confirm information regarding the total number of times a game ball has won in the winning opening by using the specific display before the game on the gaming machine is controlled to be impossible to execute. As a result, it is possible to grasp how many prize balls have been won from the total number of times game balls have been won in the winning slot before the game on the game machine is controlled to be unplayable, and to continue playing with that game machine in the future. It becomes possible to provide an opportunity for the player to play the game.

<Means C>
The invention related to means C1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference ball number) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
A predetermined condition including that the specific measured number becomes a predetermined reference number (80,000) or more (the number of difference balls reaches 80,000 in a game state other than the jackpot game state, and reaches 80,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state) control the game so that it cannot be executed,
The performance control means is
Enables the execution of a control suggestion performance (an over-prize ball abnormality suggestion performance) that suggests the possibility that the game will be unexecutably controlled by the game control means,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the specific measured number is added, an addition notification effect (playing prize ball winning effect) indicating that the specific measured number has been added can be executed.

For example, information regarding the game being controlled to be unplayable until a specific condition including that the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number is satisfied and the game is controlled to be unplayable. It is terrible to end up in a situation where players are not given any. Therefore, according to the gaming machine with this configuration, the player is confirmed with the control suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the game may be controlled to be impossible to execute, and the addition notification effect that indicates that the specific measurement number has been added. It becomes possible to do so. This makes it possible not only to provide players with a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls, but also to provide players with no information that the game will be controlled to be unexecutable until the game is controlled to be unexecutable. This makes it possible to prevent the situation from becoming impossible.

The invention related to means C2 is
In the gaming machine according to means C1,
The performance mode of the control suggestion performance includes a first performance mode (a performance mode of the over-prize ball abnormality suggestion performance in which the first difference number of balls suggestion image SB1 is displayed), and a performance mode that is more effective than the first performance mode. There is a second performance mode that suggests that there is a high possibility that the game will be controlled in an unexecutable manner (a production mode of an over-winning ball abnormality suggestion performance in which a second difference number of balls suggestion image SB2 is displayed).
The performance control means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the specific measurement number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 72001), the performance mode of the control suggestion performance can be changed from the first performance mode to the second performance mode.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific measurement number reaches the predetermined number, the first performance mode of the control suggestion performance that suggests the possibility that the game is controlled to be unexecutable is set to be higher than the first performance mode. The game is changed to a second performance mode that suggests that there is a high possibility that the game will be controlled in an unexecutable manner. Thereby, it becomes possible for the player who is paying attention to the control suggestion performance to understand that a situation where the game will be controlled to be impossible to execute is approaching due to a change in the performance mode of the control suggestion performance.

The invention related to means C3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means C1 or means C2,
The performance control means is
When the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the game control means, a control notification performance (operation notification performance) can be executed to notify that the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the game control unit. It is a gaming machine with

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, by executing a control notification effect that notifies the player that the game is being controlled to be impossible to execute, the player can appropriately understand that the game is being controlled to be impossible to execute. It becomes possible to urge the player to stop playing.

The invention related to means C4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3,
comprising a display section (display screen 50a of the image display device 50) capable of displaying the predetermined effect,
The performance control means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display section is capable of executing a prize ball number presentation (a presentation that displays a prize ball number notification image G201) indicating the number of prize balls won by a player, and the control suggestion presentation. It is.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, it is possible to have the display unit grasp the number of prize balls won by the player through the prize ball number presentation, while also allowing the player to grasp the possibility that the game will be controlled in an unexecutable manner through the control suggestion presentation. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to predict to a certain extent how long the predetermined condition will be met and the game will become impossible to play, using the prize ball number performance and the control suggestion performance, and allow the player to play the game.

The invention related to means C5 is:
In the gaming machine described in means C4,
Equipped with a special prize opening (second major prize opening 15) in which a specific number of prize balls are awarded based on the winning of game balls,
The game control means is
A predetermined determination process (step S1402, step S1408) can be executed based on the ball entering the ball entrance,
If a small win is determined by the determination process, a small win game that opens the special winning hole can be executed,
When a specific condition (the jackpot game based on the jackpot symbol D or the jackpot symbol F ends), a specific gaming state (high-probability non-time-saving state) in which it is easy to win into the special winning opening in the small winning game ),
The performance control means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the prize ball number performance and the control suggestion performance can be executed in the specific game state.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, in a specific game state in which it is easy to win a game ball into the special prize opening in a small winning game, the player can grasp the number of prize balls won by the prize ball number display and provide control suggestions. It becomes possible to grasp the possibility that the game will be controlled to be impossible due to the performance. As a result, game balls are placed in the special prize opening in the small winning game until a predetermined condition is established and the game is controlled to be impossible to execute due to the prize ball number performance and control suggestion performance executed in the specific game state. It becomes possible to have the player play the game by predicting the number of prize balls that can be won by winning the prize.

<Means D>
The invention related to means D1 is:
Judgment means (game control microcomputer 101, step S1402, step S1408) for determining whether or not there is a hit based on the ball entering the ball entry port (first starting port 11, second starting port 12) and,
Prior determination means (game control microcomputer 101, first pre-reading determination, second pre-reading determination) for pre-determining whether or not there will be a win before the winning determination is performed;
A measuring means (game control microcomputer 101, step S106) that can measure a specific measurement number (difference ball number) based on the number of prize balls given to the player;
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101, steps S313 to S315, step S2721) that can control the game to be unexecutable when the specific measurement number reaches a predetermined reference number (80000);
A production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The performance control means is
A game characterized in that, based on the result of the preliminary determination, it is possible to execute a preliminary suggestion performance (over-prize ball preliminary suggestion performance) that suggests the possibility that the game is controlled to be impossible to execute by the game control means. It is a machine.

If the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined standard number, the game will be controlled to be impossible to execute, so if the player cannot know in advance that the game will be controlled to be impossible to execute. , there is a possibility that a disadvantage may arise for the player. According to the gaming machine with this configuration, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that does not award players with excessive prize balls, and it is also possible to provide an advance suggestion that suggests that the game may be controlled without needing to be executed based on the result of the advance determination. Through the presentation, it becomes possible to grasp in advance the possibility that the game will be controlled in an unexecutable manner. This makes it possible to avoid disadvantages for the player due to not being able to know in advance that the game will be controlled to be impossible to execute.

The invention related to means D2 is:
In the gaming machine according to means D1,
special game execution means (game control microcomputer 101, S1307) that enables execution of a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player when the result of the hit determination is a win;
Based on the result of the preliminary determination, a specific determination means (step S4403, (see FIG. 56),
The performance control means executes the advance suggestion performance when it is determined by the specific determination means that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the special game to the specific measurement reaches the reference number. On the other hand, if the specific determination means determines that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the special game to the specific measurement does not reach the reference number, the advance suggestion performance can be performed. This is a gaming machine characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, if the specific determination means determines that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the special game to the specific measurement number does not reach the reference number, the advance suggestion effect is executed. Not executed. On the other hand, if the specific determination means determines that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the special game to the specific measurement number reaches the reference number, the advance suggestion effect is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately execute the advance suggestion performance according to the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means.

The invention related to means D3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means D1 or means D2,
comprising a display section (display screen 50a of the image display device 50) capable of displaying the predetermined effect,
The performance control means is
In the display section, it is possible to display a plurality of performance symbols (production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3) in a stopped state after a variable display,
In the advance suggestion performance, one of the plurality of performance patterns is stopped and displayed in a special pattern mode (performance pattern EZT in special pattern mode, see FIGS. 31(B) and 31(D)). This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the advance suggestion performance is executed, it is possible to draw attention to one of the performance symbols in the special symbol mode that is stopped and displayed on the display section. This makes it easier for the player looking at the display to know in advance that the game may be controlled in an unexecutable manner, making it easier to avoid the possibility of disadvantage for the player. It becomes possible.

The invention related to means D4 is
In the gaming machine according to means D3,
The performance control means is
After executing the advance suggestion effect, based on the result of the hit determination being a win, a control suggestion effect (over-prize ball preview effect) indicating that the game will be controlled to be impossible by the game control means. ) is executable,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the control suggestion performance, the plurality of performance symbols are stopped and displayed in the special symbol mode.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, after the advance suggestion performance is executed, a plurality of performance symbols are stopped and displayed in the special pattern mode used in the advance suggestion performance in the control suggestion performance, so that the player can It is possible to give a strong impression and make it easier for the player to understand that the game is being controlled in an unexecutable manner. This makes it possible to further avoid the possibility of disadvantages for the player.

<Means E>
The invention related to means E1 is:
Judgment means (game control microcomputer 101, step S1402, step S1408) for determining whether or not there is a hit based on the ball entering the ball entry port (first starting port 11, second starting port 12) and,
special game execution means (game control microcomputer 101, S1307) that enables execution of a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player when the result of the hit determination is a win;
Prior determination means (game control microcomputer 101, first pre-reading determination, second pre-reading determination) for pre-determining whether or not it is a win before performing the winning determination;
A measuring means (game control microcomputer 101, step S106) that can measure a specific measurement number (difference ball number) based on the number of prize balls given to the player;
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101, steps S313 to S315, step S2721) that can control the game to be unexecutable when the specific measurement number reaches a predetermined reference number (80000);
Predetermined determination means (game control microcomputer 101, production control microcomputer 121, step S3110, step S3120, step S1509, step S4408),
A production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling a predetermined production,
The performance control means is
Based on the result of the preliminary determination, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect (icon notice change effect) that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed;
If it is determined by the predetermined determination means that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the special game does not reach the reference number, the suggestion effect is made executable, while the predetermined determination means The game machine is characterized in that when it is determined that the sum of the number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the special game reaches the reference number, it is possible not to execute the suggestion performance.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, if it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the special game to the specific measured number does not reach the standard number, there is a possibility that the special game will be executed. A suggestive performance that suggests this is executed. On the other hand, if the specific measurement number reaches the reference number and it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the special game to the specific measurement number reaches the reference number, the suggestion effect will be executed. Not done. This not only prevents excessive prize balls from being awarded to the player, but also makes it possible to appropriately provide suggestive effects to the player in accordance with the result of the determination by the predetermined determination means.

The invention related to means E2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means E1,
The preliminary determination means is
If the predetermined determination means determines that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the special game does not reach the reference number, the predetermination is performed while the predetermined determination means This gaming machine is characterized in that, if it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the game reaches the reference number, the preliminary determination can not be performed.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, if it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the special game to the specific measured number does not reach the reference number, the preliminary determination means performs a preliminary determination. be exposed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value obtained by adding the specific measurement number to the number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the special game reaches the reference number, the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is not performed. As a result, whether or not a preliminary determination is made is adjusted according to the determination result of the predetermined determination means, so even in a state where the specific measurement number reaches the reference number and the game may be controlled to be impossible to execute, the suggestion effect is not performed. It becomes possible to provide the information to players appropriately.

11...First starting hole 12...Second starting hole 14...First big winning hole 14a...First big winning hole sensor 15...Second big winning hole 15a...Second big winning hole sensor 16...Specific area 16a...Specific area Sensor 17...Non-specific area 17a...Non-specific area sensor 50...Image display device 50a...Display screen 101...Game control microcomputer 121...Production control microcomputer 191...RAM clear switch PY1...Pachinko game machine

Claims (1)

a game control means capable of controlling the game;
A gaming machine equipped with a performance control means capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to a player,
When a predetermined condition including that the specific measured number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number is satisfied, controlling the game to be impossible;
The performance control means is
A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a control suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the game control means.

Images